ACURA 3.5 RL 2004 (01) PDF MANUAL

Report any errors on this page in the comment box below.

FREE ENGLISH

PDF OPERATING INSTRUCTIONS

PDF USER GUIDE - PDF USER MANUAL

PDF OWNER GUIDE - PDF OWNER MANUAL

PDF REFERENCE GUIDE - PDF REFERENCE MANUAL

PDF INSTRUCTION GUIDE - PDF INSTRUCTION MANUAL

PDF Manual Excerpt: 2004 RL Online Reference Owner's Manual Use these links (and links throughout this manual) to navigate through this reference. For a printed owner's manual, click on authorized manuals or go to www.helminc.com. Contents Owner's Identification Form Introduction..................................................................................................................................................... i A Few Words About Safety ..........................................................................................................................ii Your Vehicle at a Glance...............................................................................................................................2 Driver and Passenger Safety .......................................................................................................................5 Proper use and care of your vehicle's seat belts, and Supplemental Restraint System. Instruments and Controls...........................................................................................................................55 Instrument panel indicator and gauge, and how to use dashboard and steering column controls. Comfort and Convenience Features.......................................................................................................119 How to operate the climate control system, the audio system, and other convenience features. Before Driving .............................................................................................................................................203 What gasoline to use, how to break-in your new vehicle, and how to load luggage and other cargo. Driving...........................................................................................................................................................215 The proper way to start the engine, shift the transmission, and park, plus towing a trailer. Maintenance.................................................................................................................................................239 The Maintenance Schedule shows you when you need to take your vehicle to the dealer. Appearance Care.........................................................................................................................................299 Tips on cleaning and protecting your vehicle. Things to look for if your car ever needs body repairs. Taking Care of the Unexpected...............................................................................................................307 This section covers several problems motorists sometimes experience, and how to handle them. Technical Information...............................................................................................................................335 ID numbers, dimensions, capacities, and technical information. Warranty and Customer Relations (U.S. and Canada only).............................................................351 A summary of the warranties covering your new Honda, and how to contact us. Authorized Manuals (U.S. only)...............................................................................................................355 How to order manuals and other technical literature. Index .................................................................................................................................................................I Service Information Summary A summary of information you need when you pull up to the fuel pump. Owner’s Identification OWNER ADDRESS V. I. N. DELIVERY DATE DEALER NAME DEALER NO. ADDRESS OWNER’S SIGNATURE DEALER’S SIGNATURE STREET CITY STATE/PROVINCE ZIP CODE/ POSTAL CODE (Date sold to original retail purchaser) STREET CITY STATE/PROVINCE ZIP CODE/ POSTAL CODE This Owner’s Manual should be considered a permanent part of the vehicle, and should remain with the vehicle when it is sold. This Owner’s Manual covers all models of the 3.5 RL. You may find descriptions of equipment and features that are not on your particular model. The information and specifications included in this publication were in effect at the time of approval for printing. Honda Motor Co., Ltd. reserves the right, however, to discontinue or change specifications or design at any time without notice and without incurring any obligation whatsoever. Introduction Congratulations on your selection of the 2004 Acura 3.5 RL. We are certain As you read this manual, you will you will be pleased with your purchase of one of the finest luxury vehicles in find information that is preceded by the world. a symbol. This information is intended to help you One of the best ways to enhance the enjoyment of your new Acura is to read avoid damage to your Acura, other this manual. In it, you will learn how to operate its driving controls and property, or the environment. convenience items. Afterwards, keep this owner’s manual in your car so you can refer to it at any time. Several warranties protect your new Acura. Read the warranty booklet thoroughly so you understand the coverages and are aware of your rights and responsibilities. Maintaining your car according to the schedules given in this manual helps to keep your driving trouble-free while it preserves your investment. When your car needs maintenance, keep in mind that your Acura dealer’s staff is specially trained in servicing the many systems unique to your Acura. Your Acura dealer is dedicated to your satisfaction and will be pleased to answer any questions and concerns. California Proposition 65 Warning WARNING: This product contains or emits chemicals known to the State of California to cause cancer and birth defects or other reproductive harm. i A Few Words About Safety Your safety, and the safety of others, You will find this important safety information in a variety of forms, is very important. And operating this including: vehicle safely is an important Safety Labels ɻ on the vehicle. responsibility. Safety Messages ɻ preceded by a safety alert symbol and one of three signal words: DANGER , WARNING , or CAUTION . To help you make informed These signal words mean: decisions about safety, we have provided operating procedures and You WILL be KILLED or SERIOUSLY other information on labels and in HURT if you don’t follow instructions. this manual. This information alerts you to potential hazards that could You CAN be KILLED or SERIOUSLY hurt you or others. HURT if you don’t follow instructions. Of course, it is not practical or You CAN be HURT if you don’t follow possible to warn you about all the instructions. hazards associated with operating or maintaining your car. You must use your own good judgement. Safety Section ɻ such as Driver and Passenger Safety. Instructions ɻ how to use this vehicle correctly and safely. This entire book is filled with important safety information ɻ please read it carefully. ii Safety Headings ɻ such as Important Safety Reminders or Important Safety Precautions. Your Car at a Glance 2 MIRROR CONTROLS INSTRUMENT PANEL (P.96) (P.57) CLIMATE CONTROL DRIVING MEMORY POSITION SYSTEM (P.120) (P.98) AUDIO SYSTEM POWER SWITCHES WINDOW (P.134, 151) (P.103) TRUNK RELEASE BUTTON (P.88) FUEL FILL DOOR RELEASE HANDLE (P.205) HOOD HANDLE RELEASE (P.206) Your Car at a Glance HAZARD WARNING LIGHTS (P. 75) FOG (P. 72) LIGHTS VEHICLE ASSIST SYSTEM STABILITY OFF (P. SWITCH 228) REAR WINDOW DEFOGGER (P. 76) CRUISE CONTROL (P. 182) STEERING WHEEL WINDSHIELD WIPERS/WASHERS INSTRUMENT (P. 71) PANEL BRIGHTNESS ADJUSTMENTS HEADLIGHTS/TURN SIGNALS (P. 68, 71) 3 (P. 73, 75) (P. 76) 4 This section gives you important information about how to protect yourself and your passengers. It shows you how to use seat belts properly. It explains your Supple- mental Restraint System. And it tells you how to properly restrain infants and children in your car. ......... Important Safety Precautions . 6 ............. Your Car’s Safety Features . 7 ....................................... Seat Belts . 8 ........................................... Airbags . 9 ..................... Seats & Seat-Backs . 10 .......................... Head Restraints . 10 .................................. Door Locks . 10 ........ Pre-Drive Safety Checklist . 11 ............................ Protecting Adults . 12 ..... 1. Close and Lock the Doors . 12 ........... 2. Adjust the Front Seats . 12 ............ 3. Adjust the Seat-Backs . 13 ... 4. Adjust the Head Restraints . 14 5. Fasten and Position the Seat ..................................... Belts . 15 .... 6. Adjust the Steering Wheel . 17 7. Maintain a Proper Sitting ................................ Position . 17 ..... Advice for Pregnant Women . 18 ... Additional Safety Precautions . 19 ........................ Protecting Children . 20 All Children Must Be ............................... Restrained . 20 Children Should Sit in the Back ........................................... Seat . 21 The Passenger’s Front Airbag Poses Serious Risks ........................... to Children . 21 If You Must Drive with Several ................................... Children . 23 If a Child Requires Close .................................. Attention . 23 ... Additional Safety Precautions . 23 General Guidelines for Using ............................... Child Seats . 24 ....................... Protecting Infants . 28 Driver and Passenger Safety Protecting Small Children ......... . 32 Protecting Larger Children ....... . 35 Using Child Seats with Tethers ..................................... . 39 Using LATCH ............................. . 40 Additional Information About Your Seat Belts ................................. . 44 Seat Belt System Components .. . 44 Lap/Shoulder Belt ...................... . 44 Automatic Seat Belt Tensioners ............................... . 45 Seat Belt Maintenance ............... . 46 Additional Information About Your Airbags ..................................... . 47 SRS Components ........................ . 47 How Your Front Airbags Work ......................................... . 47 How Your Side Airbags Work ... . 49 How the SRS Indicator Light Works ....................................... . 50 How the Side Airbag Cutoff Indicator Light Works ........... . 51 Airbag Service ............................. . 52 Additional Safety Precautions ... . 52 Carbon Monoxide Hazard ............. . 53 Safety Labels ................................... . 54 Driver and Passenger Safety 5 Important Safety Precautions Always Wear Your Seat Belt You’ll find many safety Be Aware of Airbag Hazards Control Your Speed recommendations throughout this section, and throughout this manual. The recommendations on this page are the ones we consider to be the most important. Keep Your Car in Safe Condition Restrain All Children Excessive speed is a major factor in crash injuries and deaths. Generally, the higher the speed the greater the risk, but serious accidents can also occur at lower speeds. Never drive faster than is safe for current conditions, regardless of the A seat belt is your best protection in maximum speed posted. all types of collisions. Airbags supplement seat belts, but airbags are designed to inflate only in a moderate to severe frontal collision. So even though your car is equipped with airbags, make sure you and your passengers always wear your seat belts, and wear them properly. (See page .) Children are safest when they are properly restrained in the back seat, not the front seat. A child who is too small for a seat belt must be properly restrained in a child safety seat. (See page .) While airbags can save lives, they can cause serious or fatal injuries to occupants who sit too close to them, or are not properly restrained. Infants, young children, and short adults are at the greatest risk. Be sure to follow all instructions and warnings in this manual. (See page .)9 15 20 Don’t Drink and Drive 6 Having a tire blowout or a Alcohol and driving don’t mix. Even mechanical failure can be extremely one drink can reduce your ability to hazardous. To reduce the possibility respond to changing conditions, and of such problems, check your tire your reaction time gets worse with pressures and condition frequently, every additional drink. So don’t drink and perform all regularly scheduled and drive, and don’t let your friends maintenance. (See page .) drink and drive, either. 242 Driver and Passenger Safety (7) (8) (10) (1) (3) (4) (6) (8) (2) (5) (7) (6) (9) (2) (1) Safety Cage (2) Crush Zones (3) Seats & Seat-Backs (4) Head Restraints (5) Collapsible Steering Column (6) Seat Belts (7) Front Airbags (8) Side Airbags (9) Seat Belt Tensioners (10) Door Locks Your Car’s Safety Features Your car is equipped with many features that work together to protect you and your passengers during a crash. Some safety features do not require any action on your part. These include a strong steel framework that forms a safety cage around the passenger compartment; front and rear crush zones that are designed to crumple and absorb energy during a crash; a collapsible steering column; and seat belt tensioners that automatically tighten the front seat belts in the event of a crash. CONTINUED Driver and Passenger Safety 7 Your Car’s Safety Features Seat Belts Why Wear Seat Belts These safety features are designed In addition, most states and all to reduce the severity of injuries in a For your safety, and the safety of Canadian provinces require you to crash. However, you and your your passengers, your car is wear seat belts. passengers can’t take full advantage equipped with seat belts in all seating of these safety features unless you positions. remain sitting in a proper position and always wear your seat belts Your seat belt system also Not wearing a seat belt properly properly. In fact, some safety includes a light on the increases the chance of serious features can contribute to injuries if instrument panel to remind you and injury or death in a crash, even they are not used properly. your passengers to fasten your seat if you have airbags. belts. Be sure you and your passengers always wear seat Seat belts are the single most belts and wear them properly. effective safety device for adults and larger children. (Infants and smaller children must be properly restrained in child seats.) Not wearing a seat belt properly increases the chance of serious injury or death in a crash, even though your car has airbags. Help protect you in almost every type of crash, including frontal, side, and rear impacts and rollovers. 8 When properly worn, seat belts: Keep you connected to the vehicle so you can take advantage of the vehicle’s built-in safety features. Driver and Passenger Safety Your Car’s Safety Features Help keep you from being thrown Airbags against the inside of the vehicle and against other occupants. Keep you from being thrown out of the vehicle. Help keep you in a good position should the airbags ever deploy. A good position reduces the risk of injury from an inflating airbag, and allows you to get the best advantage from the airbag. Of course, seat belts cannot Your car has a Supplemental Your car also has side airbags to help completely protect you in every Restraint System (SRS) with front protect the upper torso of the driver crash. But in most cases, seat belts airbags to help protect the heads and or a front seat passenger during a can reduce your risk of serious chests of the driver and a front seat moderate to severe side impact. injury. passenger during a moderate to severe frontal collision. The most important things you need What you should do: Always wear to know about your airbags are: your seat belt, and make sure you wear it properly. Airbags do not replace seat belts. They are designed to supplement the seat belts. CONTINUED Driver and Passenger Safety 9 Your Car’s Safety Features Airbags offer no protection in rear Seats & Seat-Backs impacts, rollovers, or minor frontal or side collisions. Airbags can pose serious hazards. Door Locks What you should do: Move the front seats as far back as possible, and keep adjustable seat-backs in an upright position whenever the vehicle is moving. Keeping your doors locked reduces the chance of being thrown out of the vehicle during a crash. It also helps prevent occupants from accidentally opening a door and falling out, and outsiders from unexpectedly opening your doors. Driver and Passenger Safety What you should do: 10 Your car’s seats are designed to keep you in a comfortable, upright position so you can take full advantage of the protection offered To do their job, airbags must by seat belts and the energy inflate with tremendous force and absorbing materials in the seats. speed. So while airbags help save lives, they can cause minor injuries, or more serious or even fatal injuries if occupants are not properly restrained or sitting properly. Always wear your seat belt properly, and sit upright and as far back as possible from the steering wheel or Reclining a seat-back too far reduces dashboard. the seat belt’s effectiveness and increases the chance that the seat’s occupant will slide under the seat belt in a crash and be seriously injured. Head Restraints Head restraints can help protect you How you adjust your seats and seat- from whiplash and other injuries. For backs can also affect your safety. For maximum protection, the back of example, sitting too close to the your head should rest against the steering wheel or dashboard center of the head restraint. increases the risk of you or your passenger being injured by striking the inside of the vehicle, or by an inflating airbag. Your Car’s Safety Features Pre-Drive Safety Checklist Front seat occupants are sitting The rest of this section gives more To make sure you and your upright and as far back as possible detailed information about how you passengers get the maximum from the steering wheel and can maximize your safety. protection from your car’s safety dashboard (see page 12 ). features, check the following each Remember, however, that no safety time before you drive away: Seat-backs are upright (see page system can prevent all injuries or 13 ). deaths that can occur in severe All adults, and children who have crashes, even when seat belts are outgrown child safety seats, are Head restraints are properly properly worn and the airbags deploy. wearing their seat belts and adjusted (see page 14 ). wearing them properly (see page 15 ). All doors are closed and locked (see page 12 ). Any infant or small child is properly restrained in a child seat All cargo is properly stored or in the back seat (see page 20 ). secured (see page 212 ). Driver and Passenger Safety 11 Protecting Adults Introduction Close and Lock the Doors 2. 12 Adjust the Front Seats The following pages provide instructions on how to properly protect the driver and other adult occupants. Your car has a door monitor light on These instructions also apply to the instrument panel to indicate children who have outgrown child when a specific door is not tightly seats and are large enough to wear closed. lap/shoulder belts. (See page 35 for important additional guidelines on how to properly protect larger children.) 1. After everyone has entered the vehicle, be sure the doors are closed and locked. For security, locked doors can prevent an outsider from unexpectedly opening a door when you come to a stop. See page 83 for how to lock the doors. Driver and Passenger Safety For safety, locking the doors reduces the chance that a passenger, especially a child, will open a door while the vehicle is moving and accidentally fall out. It also reduces the chance of someone being thrown out of the vehicle during a crash. Any driver who sits too close to the steering wheel is at risk of being seriously injured or killed by striking the steering wheel or from being struck by an inflating front airbag during a crash. Protecting Adults To reduce the chance of injury, wear 3. Adjust the Seat-Backs your seat belt properly, sit upright with your back against the seat, and Sitting too close to a front move the seat away from the airbag can result in serious steering wheel to the farthest injury or death if the front distance that allows you to maintain airbags inflate. full control of the vehicle. Always sit as far back from the The National Highway Traffic Safety front airbags as possible. Administration and Transport Canada recommend that drivers adjust the seat so the center of the Most shorter drivers can get far chest is at least 10 inches away from enough away from the steering the center of the steering wheel. In wheel and still reach the pedals. addition to adjusting the seat, you However, if you are concerned about Adjust the driver’s seat-back to a can adjust the steering wheel in and sitting too close, we recommend that comfortable, upright position, out (see page 76 ). you investigate whether some type leaving ample space between your of adaptive equipment may help. chest and the airbag cover in the Also make sure your front seat center of the steering wheel. If you passenger moves the seat as far to Once your seat is adjusted correctly, sit too close to the steering wheel, the rear as possible. rock it back and forth to make sure you could be injured if the front the seat is locked in position. airbag inflates. See page 91 for how to adjust the front seats. CONTINUED Driver and Passenger Safety 13 Protecting Adults A front passenger should also adjust 4. Adjust the Head Restraints the seat-back to an upright position, but as far from the dashboard as possible. A passenger who sits too close to the dashboard could be injured if the front airbag inflates. Reclining a seat-back so that the shoulder part of the belt no longer rests against the occupant’s chest reduces the protective capability of the belt. It also increases the chance of sliding under the belt in a crash and being seriously injured. The farther a seat-back is reclined, the greater the risk of injury. 14 Reclining the seat-back too far can result in serious injury or death in a crash. Adjust the seat-back to an upright position and sit well back in the seat. See page for how to adjust seat- backs. 92 Driver and Passenger Safety Before driving, make sure everyone with an adjustable head restraint has properly positioned the head restraint. The restraint should be positioned so the back of the occupant’s head rests against the center of the restraint. A taller person should adjust the restraint as high as possible. Protecting Adults 5. Fasten and Position the Seat Belts Improperly positioning head Insert the latch plate into the buckle, restraints reduces their then tug on the belt to make sure the effectiveness and you can be belt is securely latched. Also check seriously injured in a crash. that the belt is not twisted, because a twisted belt can cause serious Make sure head restraints are injuries in a crash. in place and positioned properly before driving. Properly adjusted head restraints will help protect occupants from Position the lap part of the belt as whiplash and other crash injuries. low as possible across your hips, then pull up on the shoulder part of See page 94 for how to adjust the the belt so the lap part fits snugly. head restraints. This lets your strong pelvic bones take the force of a crash and reduces the chance of internal injuries. CONTINUED Driver and Passenger Safety 15 Protecting Adults If necessary, pull up on the belt again If a seat belt does not seem to work to remove any slack from the as it should, it may not protect the shoulder part, then check that the occupant in a crash. belt rests across the center of your chest and over your shoulder. This Anyone using a seat belt that is spreads the forces of a crash over not working properly can be the strongest bones in your upper seriously injured or killed. Have your body. Acura dealer check the belt as soon as possible. See page for additional information about your seat belt system and how to take care of your belts. If the seat belt touches or crosses your neck, or if it crosses your arm instead of your shoulder, you need to adjust the seat belt anchor height. Driver and Passenger Safety No one should sit in a seat with an inoperative seat belt. 16 44 Improperly positioning the seat belts can cause serious injury or death in a crash. Make sure all seat belts are properly positioned before driving. To adjust the height of a front seat belt anchor, press the release button and slide the anchor up or down as needed (it has four positions). Never place the shoulder portion of a lap/shoulder belt under your arm or behind your back. This could cause very serious injuries in a crash. Protecting Adults 6. Adjust the Steering Wheel 7. Maintain a Proper Sitting In addition, an occupant who is out of Position position in the front seat can be After all occupants have adjusted seriously or fatally injured by their seats and put on seat belts, it is striking interior parts of the vehicle, very important that they continue to or by being struck by an inflating sit upright, well back in their seats, front airbag. Being struck by an with their feet on the floor, until the inflating side airbag can result in vehicle is parked and the engine is possibly serious injuries. off. Sitting improperly can increase the chance of injury during a crash. For Sitting improperly or out of example, if an occupant slouches, position can result in serious lies down, turns sideways, sits injury or death in a crash. Adjust the steering wheel, if needed, forward, leans forward or sideways, so that the wheel points toward your or puts one or both feet up, the Always sit upright, well back in chest, not toward your face. chance of injury during a crash is the seat, with your feet on the greatly increased. floor. Pointing the steering wheel toward your chest provides optimal protection from the airbag. See page 76 for how to adjust the steering wheel. CONTINUED Driver and Passenger Safety 17 Protecting Adults Remember, to get the best Advice for Pregnant Women Pregnant women should also sit protection from your car’s airbags upright and as far back as possible and other safety features, you must from the steering wheel or sit properly and wear your seat belt dashboard. This will reduce the risk properly. of injuries to both the mother and her unborn child that can be caused by a crash or an inflating airbag. Each time you have a check-up, ask your doctor if it’s okay for you to drive. Because protecting the mother is the best way to protect her unborn child, a pregnant woman should always wear a seat belt whenever she drives or rides in a vehicle. Remember to keep the lap portion of the belt as low as possible across your hips. 18 Driver and Passenger Safety Additional Safety Precautions Two people should never use the same seat belt. If they do, they could be very seriously injured in a crash. Do not put any accessories on seat belts. Devices intended to improve occupant comfort or reposition the shoulder part of a seat belt can severely compromise the protective capability of the seat belt and increase the chance of serious injury in a crash. Protecting Adults Do not place hard or sharp objects Do not attach hard objects on or between yourself and a front near a front door. If a side airbag airbag. Carrying hard or sharp inflates, a cup holder or other hard objects on your lap, or driving with object attached on or near the a pipe or other sharp objects in door could be propelled inside the your mouth, can result in injuries vehicle and hurt someone. if your front airbag inflates. Keep your hands and arms away Do not attach or place objects on from the airbag covers. If your the front airbag covers. Any object hands or arms are close to the attached to or placed on the covers airbag cover in the center of the marked ‘‘SRS AIRBAG’’ in the steering wheel or on top of the center of the steering wheel and dashboard, they could be injured if on top of the dashboard could the front airbag inflates. interfere with the proper operation of the airbags. Or, if the airbags inflate, the objects could be propelled inside the vehicle and hurt someone. Driver and Passenger Safety 19 Protecting Children Driver and Passenger Safety All Children Must Be Restrained Each year, many children are injured or killed in vehicle crashes because they are either unrestrained or not properly restrained. In fact, vehicle accidents are the number one cause of death of children ages 12 and under. To reduce the number of child deaths and injuries, every state and Canadian province requires that infants and children be restrained whenever they ride in a vehicle. Any child who is too small to wear a seat belt should be properly restrained in a child seat. 24 A larger child should always be restrained with a seat belt, and use a booster, if needed. 35 Children who are unrestrained or improperly restrained can be seriously injured or killed in a crash. Any child too small for a seat belt should be properly restrained in a child seat. A larger child should be properly restrained with a seat belt. Children depend on adults to protect them. However, despite their best intentions, many parents and other adults may not know how to properly protect young passengers. (See page .) So if you have children, or if you ever need to drive with a grandchild or other children in your car, be sure to read this section. (See page .) 20 According to accident statistics, children of all ages and sizes are safer when they are restrained in the back seat, not the front seat. The National Highway Traffic Safety Administration and Transport Canada recommend that all children ages 12 and under be properly restrained in the back seat. In the back seat, children are less likely to be injured by striking hard interior parts during a collision or hard braking. Also, children cannot be injured by an inflating airbag when they ride in the back. Children Should Sit in the Back Seat Protecting Children The Passenger’s Front Airbag Small Children Poses Serious Risks to Children Placing a forward-facing child seat in Front airbags have been designed to the front seat of a vehicle equipped help protect adults in a moderate to with a passenger’s front airbag can severe frontal collision. To do this, be hazardous. If the vehicle seat is the passenger’s front airbag is quite too far forward, or the child’s head is large, and it inflates with tremendous thrown forward during a collision, an speed. inflating front airbag can strike the child with enough force to kill or Infants very seriously injure a small child. Never put a rear-facing child seat in the front seat of a vehicle equipped Larger Children with a passenger’s front airbag. If Children who have outgrown child the airbag inflates, it can hit the back seats are also at risk of being injured of the child seat with enough force or killed by an inflating passenger’s to kill or very seriously injure an front airbag. Whenever possible, infant. larger children should sit in the back seat, in a booster seat if needed, and be properly restrained with a seat belt. (See page 35 for important information about protecting larger children.) CONTINUED Driver and Passenger Safety 21 Protecting Children U.S. Models Canadian Models To remind you of the passenger’s To remind you of the front airbag front airbag hazards, and that hazards, your car has warning labels children must be properly restrained on the driver’s and front passenger’s in the back seat, your car has visors. Please read and follow the warning labels on the dashboard and instructions on these labels. on the driver’s and front passenger’s visors. Please read and follow the instructions on these labels. 22 Driver and Passenger Safety Protecting Children If You Must Drive with Several If a Child Requires Close Additional Safety Precautions Children Attention Use childproof door locks to Your car has three seating positions prevent children from opening the in the back seat where children can doors. be properly restrained. If you ever have to carry more than three children in your car: Use the main power window switch to prevent children from opening the rear windows. 12 17 15 Driver and Passenger Safety 23 Many parents say they prefer to put an infant or small child in the front passenger seat so they can watch the child, or because the child requires attention. Placing a child in the front seat exposes the child to hazards from the passenger’s front airbag, and paying close attention to a child distracts the driver from the important tasks of driving, placing both of you at risk. If a child requires physical attention or frequent visual contact, we strongly recommend that another adult ride with the child in the back seat. The back seat is far safer for a child than the front. Using this feature will prevent children from opening the doors and accidentally falling out (see page ). Using this feature will prevent children from playing with the windows, which could expose them to hazards or distract the driver (see page 104 ). 87 Place the largest child in the front seat, provided the child is large enough to wear a seat belt properly (see page 35 ). Move the vehicle seat as far to the rear as possible (see page ). Have the child sit upright and well back in the seat (see page ). Make sure the seat belt is properly positioned and secured (see page ). CONTINUED Protecting Children Driver and Passenger Safety General Guidelines for Using Child Seats Selecting a Child Seat The child seat should meet safety standards. Do Lock all doors and the trunk when not leave children alone in your your car is not in use. car. Keep vehicle keys and remote transmitters out of the reach of children. Children Leaving children without who play in vehicles can adult supervision is illegal in most accidentally get trapped inside the states and Canadian provinces, trunk and be seriously injured or and can be very hazardous. For could die. Teach your children not example, infants and small to play in or around vehicles. children left in a vehicle on a hot Know how to operate the day can die from heatstroke. And emergency trunk opener and children left alone with the key in decide if your children should be the ignition can accidentally set shown how to use this feature (see the vehicle in motion, possibly page ). injuring themselves or others. Even very young children learn how to unlock vehicle doors, turn on the ignition, and open the trunk, which can lead to accidental injury or death. The following pages give general guidelines for selecting and installing child seats for infants and small children. To provide proper protection, a child seat should meet three requirements: The child seat should meet Federal Motor Vehicle Safety Standard 213 (FMVSS 213) or Canadian Motor Vehicle Safety Standard 213 (CMVSS 213). Look for the manufacturer’s statement of compliance on the box. 89 1. 24 Protecting Children 3. The child seat should fit the vehicle seating position (or positions) where it will be used. Due to variations in the design of child seats, vehicle seats, and seat belts, all child seats will not fit all vehicle seating positions. However, Acura is confident that one or more child seat models can fit and be properly installed in all recommended seating positions in 2. The child seat should be of the Small Children: A child who is too your car. proper type and size to fit the child. large for a rear-facing child seat, and who can sit up without support, Before purchasing a child seat, we Infants: Children up to about one should be restrained in a forward- recommend that parents test the year old should be restrained in a facing child seat. See page 32 for child seat in the specific vehicle rear-facing, reclining child seat. Only additional information on protecting seating position (or positions) where a rear-facing seat provides the small children. they intend to use the seat. If a proper support to protect an infant’s previously purchased child seat does head, neck, and back. See page not fit, you may need to buy a 28 for additional information on different one that will fit. protecting infants. CONTINUED Driver and Passenger Safety 25 Protecting Children Placing a Child Seat Front Passenger’s Seat This page briefly summarizes Acura’s Infants: Never in the front seat, due recommendations on where to place to the front airbag hazard. rear-facing and forward-facing child seats in your car. Small children: Not recommended, due to the front airbag hazard. If a small child must ride in front, Airbags Pose Serious move the vehicle seat to the rear- Risks to Children most position and secure a The passenger’s front airbag forward-facing child seat with the inflates with enough force to kill seat belt (see page ). or seriously injure an infant in a rear-facing child seat. Back Seats Infants: Recommended positions. Properly secure a rear-facing child seat (see page ). Small children: Recommended positions. Properly secure a forward-facing child seat (see page 32 ). Driver and Passenger Safety 32 A small child in a forward-facing child seat is also at risk. If the vehicle seat is too far forward, or the child’s head is thrown forward during a collision, an inflating front airbag can kill or seriously injure the child. 28 If a small child must ride in the front, follow the instructions provided in this section. 26 Protecting Children To provide security during normal driving maneuvers as well as during a collision, we recommend that parents secure a child seat as firmly as possible. However, a child seat does not need to be ‘‘rock solid.’’ In some vehicles or seating positions, it may be difficult to install a child seat so that it does not move at all. Some side-to- side or back-and-forth movement can be expected and should not reduce the child seat’s effectiveness. If the child seat is not secure, try installing it in a different seating position, or use a different style of child seat that can be firmly secured in the desired seating position. Driver and Passenger Safety 27 Make sure the child is properly strapped in the child seat according to the child seat maker’s instructions. A child who is not properly secured in a child seat can be thrown out of the seat in a All child seats are crash and be seriously injured. designed to be secured to the vehicle with the lap part of a lap/ shoulder belt. Some child seats can be secured to the vehicle’s LATCH anchorage system instead. A child whose seat is not properly secured to the vehicle can be endangered in a crash. See pages , and for instructions on how to properly secure child seats in this vehicle. Installing a Child Seat 3. Secure the child in the child seat. After selecting a proper child seat, and a good position to install the seat, there are three main steps in installing the seat: 1. Storing a Child Seat When you are not using a child seat, either remove it and store it in a safe place, or make sure it is properly secured. An unsecured child seat can be thrown around the vehicle during a crash or sudden stop and injure 3329 40 someone. 2. After installing a child seat, push and pull the seat forward and from side to side to verify that it is secure. Properly secure the child seat to the vehicle. Make sure the child seat is firmly secured. Protecting Children Protecting Infants Child Seat Type Only a rear-facing child seat provides proper support for a baby’s head, neck, and back. Infants up to about one year of age must be restrained in a rear-facing child seat. Two types of seats may be used: a seat designed exclusively for infants, or a convertible seat used in the rear- facing, reclining mode. 28 Driver and Passenger Safety We recommend that an infant be restrained in a rear-facing child seat until the infant is at least one year old, reaches the seat maker’s weight or height limit, and is able to sit up without support. Placing a rear-facing child seat in the front seat can result in serious injury or death if the passenger’s front airbag inflates. Always place a rear-facing child seat in the back seat, not the front. Rear-Facing Child Seat Placement In this vehicle, a rear-facing child seat can be placed in any seating position in the back, but not in the front seat. Never put a rear-facing child seat in the front seat. If the passenger’s front airbag inflates, it can hit the back of the child seat with enough force to kill or seriously injure an infant. If an infant must be closely watched, we recommend that another adult sit in the back seat with the baby. Do not put a rear-facing child seat in a forward-facing position. If placed facing forward, an infant could be very seriously injured during a frontal collision. Protecting Children Rear-Facing Child Seat Installation The lap/shoulder belts in the back seats have a locking mechanism that must be activated to secure a child seat. The following pages provide instructions and tips on how to secure a rear-facing child seat with this type of seat belt. If you have a child seat designed to be attached to the vehicle’s LATCH anchorage system, follow the 1. With the child seat in the desired 2. To activate the lockable retractor, instructions on page 40 . back seating position, route the slowly pull the shoulder part of the belt through the child seat belt all the way out until it stops, according to the seat maker’s then let the belt feed back into the instructions, then insert the latch retractor. plate into the buckle. 3. After the belt has retracted, tug on it. If the belt is locked, you will not be able to pull it out. If you can pull the belt out, it is not locked and you will need to repeat these steps. CONTINUED Driver and Passenger Safety 29 Protecting Children Driver and Passenger Safety To deactivate the locking mechanism and remove a child seat, unlatch the buckle, unroute the seat belt, and let the belt fully retract. 4. After confirming that the belt is 5. Push and pull the child seat locked, grab the shoulder part of forward and from side to side to the belt near the buckle and pull verify that it is secure enough to up to remove any slack from the stay upright during normal driving lap part of the belt. Remember, if maneuvers. If the child seat is not the lap part of the belt is not tight, secure, unlatch the belt, allow it to the child seat will not be secure. retract fully, then repeat these To remove slack, it may help to steps. put weight on the child seat, or push on the back of the seat, while pulling up on the belt. 30 Protecting Children Rear-Facing Child Seat Installation When properly installed, a rear- Additional Precautions for Infants Tips facing child seat may prevent the Never hold an infant on your lap. driver or a front-seat passenger from If you are not wearing a seat belt moving the seat as far back as in a crash, you could be thrown recommended (see page 12 ). Or it forward into the dashboard and may prevent them from locking the crush the infant. seat-back in the desired upright position (see page 13 ). If you are wearing a seat belt, the infant can be torn from your arms In either case, we recommend that during a crash. For example, if you place the child seat directly your car crashes into a parked behind the front passenger seat, vehicle at 30 mph (48 km/h), a move the front seat as far forward as 20-lb (9 kg) infant will become a needed, and leave it unoccupied. Or 600-lb (275 kg) force, and you will you may wish to get a smaller child not be able to hold on. For proper protection, an infant must seat that allows you to safely carry a ride in a reclined, or semi-reclined front passenger. Never put a seat belt over yourself position. To determine the proper and an infant. During a crash, the reclining angle, check with the baby’s belt could press deep into the doctor or follow the seat maker’s infant and cause very serious recommendations. injuries. To achieve the desired reclining angle, it may help to put a rolled up towel under the toe of the child seat, as shown. Driver and Passenger Safety 31 Protecting Children Protecting Small Children Child Seat Type A child at least one year old who can sit up without support, and who fits within the child seat maker’s weight and height limits, should be restrained in a forward-facing, upright child seat. Of the different seats available, we recommend those that have a five- point harness system as shown. 32 Driver and Passenger Safety Child Seat Placement In this vehicle, the best place to install a forward-facing child seat is in one of the seating positions in the back seat. Placing a forward-facing child seat in the front seat of a vehicle equipped with a passenger’s front airbag can be hazardous. If the vehicle seat is too far forward, or the child’s head is thrown forward during a collision, an inflating front airbag can strike the child with enough force to cause very serious or fatal injuries. If a small child must be closely watched, we recommend that another adult sit in the back seat with the child. If it is necessary to put a forward- facing child seat in the front, move the vehicle seat as far to the rear as possible, be sure the child seat is firmly secured to the vehicle, and the child is properly strapped in the seat. Improperly placing a forward- facing child seat in the front seat can result in serious injury or death if the front airbags inflate. If you must place a forward- facing child seat in front, move the vehicle seat as far back as possible and properly restrain the child. Protecting Children Child Seat Installation The lap/shoulder belts in the back and front passenger seating positions have a locking mechanism that must be activated to secure a child seat. The following pages provide instructions on how to secure a forward-facing child seat with this type of seat belt. If you have a child seat designed to be attached to the vehicle’s LATCH anchorage system, follow the 1. With the child seat in the desired 2. To activate the lockable retractor, instructions on page 40 . seating position, route the belt slowly pull the shoulder part of the through the child seat according belt all the way out until it stops, to the seat maker’s instructions, then let the belt feed back into the then insert the latch plate into the retractor. buckle. 3. After the belt has retracted, tug on it. If the belt is locked, you will not be able to pull it out. If you can pull the belt out, it is not locked and you will need to repeat these steps. CONTINUED Driver and Passenger Safety 33 Protecting Children Driver and Passenger Safety To deactivate the locking mechanism in order to remove a child seat, unlatch the buckle, unroute the seat belt, and let the belt fully retract. 4. After confirming that the belt is 5. Push and pull the child seat locked, grab the shoulder part of forward and from side to side to the belt near the buckle and pull verify that it is secure enough to up to remove any slack from the stay upright during normal driving lap part of the belt. Remember, if maneuvers. If the child seat is not the lap part of the belt is not tight, secure, unlatch the belt, allow it to the child seat will not be secure. It retract fully, then repeat these may help to put weight on the steps. child seat, or push on the back of the seat, while pulling up on the belt. 34 Protecting Children Additional Precautions for Small Protecting Larger Children Children When a child reaches the Never hold a small child on your recommended weight or height limit lap. for a forward-facing child seat, the child should sit in the back seat on a booster and wear a lap/shoulder belt. We recommend that the child use a booster seat until the child is tall enough to use the seat belt without a booster. The following pages give instructions on how to check proper seat belt fit, what kind of booster seat to use if one is needed, and important precautions for a child Never put a seat belt over yourself who must sit in the front seat. and a child. Driver and Passenger Safety Allowing a larger child to sit If you are not wearing a seat improperly in the front seat can belt in a crash, you could be result in injury or death if the thrown forward into the passenger’s front airbag inflates. dashboard and crush the child. If a larger child must sit in front, If you are wearing a seat belt, the make sure the child moves the child can be torn from your arms seat as far back as possible, during a crash. For example, if uses a booster seat if needed, your car crashes into a parked and wears the seat belt properly. vehicle at 30 mph (48 km/h), a 30-lb (14 kg) child will become a 900-lb (410 kg) force, and you will not be able to hold on. During a crash, the belt could press deep into the child and cause very serious injuries. CONTINUED 35 Protecting Children Checking Seat Belt Fit their thighs as shown, the child is Do not put any accessories on a seat probably big enough to wear the seat belt. belt. Two children should never use the same seat belt. Do not let a child wear a seat belt across the neck or over the stomach. Do not let a child put the shoulder part of a seat belt behind the back or under the arm. 15 Driver and Passenger Safety Devices intended to improve occupant comfort or reposition the shoulder part of a seat belt, severely compromise the protective capability of the seat belt and increase the chance of serious injury in a crash. If they do, they could be very seriously injured in a crash. To determine if a lap/shoulder belt properly fits a child, have the child sit in the rear seat, all the way back against the seat and put on the seat belt. Follow the instructions on page . Then check how the belt fits. However, if the shoulder belt touches or crosses the child’s neck, or if the lap belt crosses the child’s stomach, the child needs to use a booster seat. This could result in serious neck and internal injuries during a crash. This could cause very serious injuries during a crash. It also increases the chance that the child will slide under the belt in a If the shoulder part of the belt rests crash and be injured. over the child’s collarbone and against the center of the chest, and the lap belt rests over the child’s hipbones and touches the tops of 36 Protecting Children Using a Booster Seat A child should continue using a When Can a Larger Child Sit in Front booster seat until the child exceeds The National Highway Traffic Safety the booster seat manufacturer’s Administration and Transport requirements. Canada recommend that all children ages 12 and under be properly Even then, the child may still need to restrained in a back seat. use a booster seat. Note that some states now require children to use The back seat is the safest place for boosters until they reach a certain a child of any age or size. age and/or weight. Be sure to check current laws in the state or states In addition, the passenger’s front where you intend to drive. airbag poses serious risks to children. If the seat is too far forward, or the child’s head is thrown forward If a child needs a booster seat, we during a collision, or the child is recommend choosing a high or low- unrestrained or out of position, an back style that allows the child to be inflating front airbag can kill or directly secured with the lap/ seriously injure the child. shoulder belt. The side airbag also poses risks. If Whichever style you select, follow any part of a larger child’s body is in the booster seat maker’s instructions. the path of a deploying airbag, the child could receive possibly serious injuries. CONTINUED Driver and Passenger Safety 37 Protecting Children Of course, children vary widely. And Physical Size If you decide that a child can safely while age may be one indicator of ride up front, be sure to: when a child can safely ride in the front, there are other important Carefully read the owner’s manual factors you should consider. and make sure you understand all seat belt instructions and all safety information. Maturity Have the child sit up straight, back against the seat, and feet on or near the floor. Check that the child’s seat belt is properly positioned and secured. 38 Driver and Passenger Safety Physically, a child must be large enough for the lap/shoulder belt to properly fit over the hips, chest, and shoulder (see pages 15 and 35 ). If the seat belt does not fit properly, the child should not sit in the front. Move the vehicle seat to the rear- To safely ride in front, a child must most position. be able to follow the rules, including sitting properly and wearing the seat belt properly throughout a ride. Remind the child not to lean toward the door. Supervise the child. Even mature children sometimes need to be reminded to fasten the seat belts or sit properly. Protecting Children Using Child Seats with Tethers Since a tether can provide additional security, we recommend using a tether whenever one is required or available. (Tethers are required in Canada.) Your car has three tether anchorage To use either outside anchorage points for securing a tether-style point, lift the rear head restraint, child seat to the vehicle. One tether then route the tether strap over the anchorage point for each of the outer seat-back between the legs of the rear seats and center rear seat is head restraint. located under the rear window. CONTINUED Driver and Passenger Safety 39 Protecting Children Driver and Passenger Safety Using LATCH 40 TETHER STRAP HOOK TETHER STRAP HOOK LOWER ANCHOR MARKS LOWER TETHER ANCHORAGE POINT TETHER ANCHORAGE POINT ANCHORS Attach the tether strap hook to the Your car is equipped with LATCH tether anchorage point as shown in (Lower Anchors and Tethers for the illustration, then tighten the Children) at the outer rear seats. strap according to the child seat The lower anchors are located maker’s instructions. Make sure the between the seat-back and seat strap is not twisted. bottom and are to be used only with a child seat designed for use with LATCH. Small marks are positioned to indicate the locations of each anchor point. To install a LATCH-compatible child seat: 1. Move the seat belt buckle or seat belt tongue away from the lower anchors. 2. 3. Protecting Children SEAT-BACK TRIM COVER Rigid type Pull up the seat-back trim cover. 4. Put the child seat in the rear left or right vehicle seat and attach the Make sure there are no foreign child seat to the lower anchors objects around the anchors. according to the child seat maker’s Foreign objects could get in the instructions. way of a secure connection between the child seat and the anchors. CONTINUED Driver and Passenger Safety 41 Protecting Children Flexible type 42 5. Follow the child seat maker’s 6. Lift the rear head restraint, then 7. instructions for any additional route the tether strap over the advice on adjusting or tightening seat-back between the legs of the the fit. head restraint. Driver and Passenger Safety Attach the tether strap hook to the tether anchorage point, and tighten the strap according to the child seat maker’s instructions. Make sure the strap is not twisted. TETHER STRAP HOOK TETHER ANCHORAGE POINT 8. Push and pull the child seat forward and from side to side to verify that it is secure enough to stay upright during normal driving maneuvers. Protecting Children Driver and Passenger Safety 43 Additional Information About Your Seat Belts Seat Belt System Components Lap/Shoulder Belt 44 The seat belt system also includes a light on the instrument panel to remind you and your passengers to fasten your belts. If the driver’s seat belt is not fastened before the ignition is turned ON (II), the light will come on and a beeper will also sound. The beeper will stop after a few seconds, but the light will stay on until the driver’s seat belt is fastened. To unlock the belt, push the red Your seat belt system includes lap/ PRESS button on the buckle. shoulder belts in all five seating positions. The front seat belts are also equipped with automatic seat belt tensioners. This seat belt has a single belt that goes over your shoulder, across your chest and across your hips. To fasten the belt, insert the latch plate into the buckle, then tug on the belt to make sure the buckle is latched. Guide the belt across your body to the door pillar. After exiting the vehicle, be sure the belt is out of the way and will not get closed in the door. All seat belts have an emergency locking retractor. In normal driving, the retractor lets you move freely in your seat while it keeps some tension on the belt. During a collision or sudden stop, the retractor automatically locks the belt to help restrain your body. The seat belts in all seating positions except the driver’s have an additional locking mechanism that must be activated to secure a child seat. (See pages 29 and 33 for instructions on how to secure child seats with this type of seat belt.) Driver and Passenger Safety Additional Information About Your Seat Belts If the shoulder part of the belt is Automatic Seat Belt Tensioners might not cause the airbags to pulled all the way out, the locking deploy. In this case, the airbags mechanism will activate. The belt would not be needed but the will retract, but it will not allow the additional seat belt tension can be passenger to move freely. helpful. To deactivate the locking The tensioners will be activated in a mechanism, unlatch the buckle and collision severe enough to cause the let the seat belt fully retract. To front airbags to inflate. refasten the belt, pull it out only as far as needed. See page for instructions on how to wear the lap/shoulder belt properly. For added protection, the front seat belts are equipped with automatic The SRS indicator light will seat belt tensioners. When activated, come on if there is a the tensioners immediately tighten problem with your automatic seat the belts to help hold the driver and belt tensioners (see page ). a front passenger in place. The tensioners are designed to activate primarily in frontal collisions. The tensioners are independent of the airbag system, so they can be activated during a collision that 45 When the tensioners are activated, the seat belts will remain tight until 15 they are unbuckled in the normal way. 50 Driver and Passenger Safety Additional Information About Your Seat Belts Seat Belt Maintenance U.S. Models 46 If a seat belt is worn during a crash, For safety, you should check the it must be replaced by the dealer. A condition of your seat belts regularly. belt that has been worn during a crash may not provide the same level Pull each belt out fully and look for of protection in a subsequent crash. frays, cuts, burns, and wear. Check The dealer should also inspect the that the latches work smoothly and anchors for damage and replace that the lap/shoulder belts retract them if needed. easily. Any belt not in good condition or not working properly will not Automatic seat belt tensioners that provide good protection and should deployed during a crash must be be replaced as soon as possible. replaced. For information on how to clean your Acura provides a lifetime warranty seat belts, see page .303 on seat belts. Acura will repair or replace any seat belt component that fails to function properly during normal use. Please see your Acura Warranty Information booklet for details. Driver and Passenger Safety Not checking or maintaining seat belts can result in serious injury or death if the seat belts do not work properly when needed. Check your seat belts regularly and have any problem corrected as soon as possible. Additional Information About Your Airbags SRS Components An indicator light on the How Your Front Airbags Work Your Supplemental Restraint System instrument panel that alerts you to (SRS) includes: a possible problem with the system (see page 51 ). Two front airbags. The driver’s airbag is stored in the center of Emergency backup power in case the steering wheel; the front your car’s electrical system is passenger’s airbag is stored in the disconnected in a crash. dashboard. Both are marked ‘‘SRS AIRBAG.’’ Automatic seat belt tensioners (see page 45 ). Sensors that can detect a If you ever have a moderate to moderate to severe frontal severe frontal collision, the sensors collision. will detect the vehicle’s rapid deceleration. If the rate of A sophisticated electronic system deceleration is high enough, the that continually monitors and control unit will instantly inflate the records information about the front airbags. sensors, the control unit, the airbag activators, and driver and passenger seat belt use when the ignition is ON (II). CONTINUED Driver and Passenger Safety 47 Additional Information About Your Airbags During a frontal crash, your seat belts help restrain your lower body and torso. Your airbag provides a cushion to help restrain and protect your head and chest. 48 After a crash, you may see what looks like smoke. This is actually powder from the airbag’s surface. Although the powder is not harmful, people with respiratory problems may experience some temporary Since both airbags use the same discomfort. If this occurs, get out of sensors, both airbags normally the vehicle as soon as it is safe to do inflate at the same time. However, it so. is possible for only one airbag to inflate. This can occur when the severity of a collision is at the margin, or threshold, that determines whether After inflating, the front airbags or not the airbags will deploy. In immediately deflate, so they won’t such cases, the seat belt will provide interfere with the driver’s visibility, sufficient protection, and the or the ability to steer or operate supplemental protection offered by other controls. the airbag would be minimal. The total time for inflation and deflation is approximately one-tenth of a second, so fast that most occupants are not aware that the airbags deployed until they see them lying in their laps. Driver and Passenger Safety Additional Information About Your Airbags How Your Side Airbags Work To get the best protection from the Your car is equipped with side side airbags, front seat occupants airbags for the driver and a front should wear their seat belts and sit seat passenger. The airbags are upright and well back in their seats. stored in the outer edges of the front seat-backs, and both are marked ‘‘SIDE AIRBAG.’’ If you ever have a moderate to severe side impact, the sensors will detect rapid deceleration and signal the control unit to instantly inflate either the driver’s or the passenger’s side airbag. Only one airbag will deploy during a side impact. If the impact is on the passenger’s side, the passenger’s side airbag will deploy even if there is no passenger. Driver and Passenger Safety 49 Additional Information About Your Airbags 50 How the SRS Indicator Light If the light comes on at any other Works time, or does not come on at all, you The purpose of the SRS should have the system checked by indicator light is to alert your dealer. For example: you to a potential problem with your front airbags. This light will also If the SRS indicator light does not alert you to a potential problem with come on after you turn the ignition your automatic seat belt tensioners switch to ON (II). (page 45 ); or your side airbags or passenger’s side airbag automatic If the light stays on after the cutoff system (page 49 ). engine starts. When you turn the ignition ON (II), If the light comes on or flashes on this indicator will light briefly then and off while you drive. go out. This tells you that the system is working properly. If you see any of these indications, your front or side airbags may not deploy, your passenger’s side airbag automatic cutoff system may not work properly, or your seat belt tensioners may not work when you need them. See your Acura dealer as soon as possible. Driver and Passenger Safety Ignoring the SRS indicator light can result in serious injury or death if the airbags, cutoff system, or tensioners do not work properly. Have your car checked by a dealer as soon as possible if the SRS light alerts you to a potential problem. Additional Information About Your Airbags How the Side Airbag Cutoff If a small-statured adult leans A front seat passenger should not Indicator Light Works sideways, or larger adult slouches use a cushion or other object as a This light alerts you that and leans sideways into the backrest. It may prevent the cutoff the passenger’s side airbag deployment path of the side airbag, system from working properly. has been automatically shut off. the system may also shut off the side airbag. When you turn the ignition switch to It does not mean there is a problem ON (II), the indicator should light with your side airbags. It means that If the side airbag cutoff indicator briefly and go out (see page ). If it the side airbag cutoff system has light comes on, you should have the doesn’t light, stays on, or comes on activated to prevent the side airbag passenger sit upright. Once the while driving without a passenger in from deploying. passenger is out of the deployment the front seat, have the system path of the side airbag, the system checked. To reduce the risk of injury from an will turn the airbag back on and the inflating side airbag, your car has an light will go out. automatic cutoff system for the passenger’s side airbag. Although Acura does not encourage children to ride in the front seat, this system is designed to shut off the side airbag if a child leans sideways and the child’s head is in the side airbag deployment path. 51 59 Driver and Passenger Safety Additional Information About Your Airbags Airbag Service Additional Safety Precautions Your front and side airbag systems are virtually maintenance-free, and there are no parts you can safely service. However, you must have your car serviced if: Your airbags ever inflate. Any airbag that has deployed must be replaced along with the control unit and other related parts. Do not try to remove or replace any airbag by yourself. This must be done by an Acura dealer or a knowledgeable body shop. Do not attempt to deactivate your airbags. Do not tamper with airbag components or wiring for any reason. Do not cover or replace front seat- back covers without consulting an Acura dealer. Do not expose the front seat-backs to water. The SRS indicator light alerts you to a problem. Driver and Passenger Safety Together, airbags and seat belts provide the best protection. Tampering could cause the airbags to deploy, possibly causing very serious injury. Improperly replacing or covering front seat- back covers can prevent your side airbags from inflating during a collision. If rain or spilled water soaks into a seat-back, it can prevent the side airbag system from working properly. Take your car to an authorized Acura dealer as soon as possible. If you ignore this indication, the airbags might not inflate when you need them. See page for further information and precautions relating to your airbags. 211 52 Your car’s exhaust contains carbon monoxide gas. You should have no problem with carbon monoxide entering the vehicle in normal driving if you maintain your car properly. Have the exhaust system inspected for leaks whenever: The vehicle is raised for an oil change. You notice a change in the sound of the exhaust. The vehicle was in an accident that may have damaged the under- side. High levels of carbon monoxide can collect rapidly in enclosed areas, such as a garage. Do not run the engine with the garage door closed. Even with the door open, run the engine only long enough to move the vehicle out of the garage. Carbon monoxide gas is toxic. Breathing it can cause unconsciousness and even kill you. Avoid any enclosed areas or activities that expose you to carbon monoxide. Carbon Monoxide Hazard With the trunk lid open, air flow can pull exhaust gas into your car’s interior and create a hazardous condition. If you must drive with the trunk lid open, open all the windows and set the climate control system as shown below. If you must sit in your parked vehicle, even in an unconfined area, with the engine running, adjust the climate control system as follows: 1. Select the Fresh Air mode. 2. Select the mode. 3. Set the fan speed to high. 4. Set the temperature control to a comfortable setting. Driver and Passenger Safety 53 Safety Labels These labels are in the locations shown. They warn you of potential hazards that could cause serious injury. Read these labels carefully. If a label comes off or becomes hard to read, contact your Acura dealer for a replacement. U.S. models only 54 SUN VISOR HOOD U.S. models Canadian models DASHBOARD ˎ The U.S. car model Driver and Passenger Safety RADIATOR CAP This section gives information about the controls and displays that contribute to the daily operation of your Acura. All the essential controls are within easy reach. ........................... Control Locations . 56 ............................... Indicator Lights . 57 ............................................. Gauges . 63 ............................... Speedometer . 63 ................................. Tachometer . 63 ..................................... Odometer . 64 ................................... Trip Meter . 64 Outside Temperature ................................... Indicator . 65 ................... Temperature Gauge . 65 .................................. Fuel Gauge . 65 Maintenance Required ................................... Indicator . 66 Controls Near the Steering ....................................... Wheel . 67 ................................... Headlights . 68 .................... Automatic Lighting . 69 ............ Daytime Running Lights . 70 .... Instrument Panel Brightness . 71 ................................ Turn Signals . 71 ................................... Fog Lights . 72 ..................... Windshield Wipers . 73 .................. Windshield Washers . 75 .......................... Hazard Warning . 75 ............. Rear Window Defogger . 76 .... Steering Wheel Adjustments . 76 ............................... Keys and Locks . 79 .............................................. Keys . 79 .................... Immobilizer System . 80 ............................ Ignition Switch . 82 ...................... Power Door Locks . 83 ................... Remote Transmitter . 84 .............. Childproof Door Locks . 87 ........................................... Trunk . 88 ........ Emergency Trunk Opener . 89 .................................... Glove Box . 90 ............................ Seat Adjustments . 91 ......... Driver’s Seat Adjustments . 91 ........... Driver’s Lumbar Support . 93 Instruments and Controls Front Passenger’s Seat Adjustments ............................ . 93 Head Restraints .......................... . 94 Rear Seat Armrest ...................... . 95 Mirrors ............................................. . 96 Adjusting the Power Mirrors .... . 96 Driving Position Memory System .......................................... . 98 Seat Heaters .................................. . 100 Ski Sleeve ....................................... . 101 Power Windows ............................ . 103 Moonroof ....................................... . 105 Parking Brake ............................... . 107 Digital Clock .................................. . 108 Sunglasses Holder ........................ . 109 Beverage Holder ........................... . 110 Console Compartment ................. . 111 Coin Box ........................................ . 111 Sun Visor ........................................ . 112 Vanity Mirror ................................ . 112 Accessory Power Socket ............. . 113 Cigarette Lighter .......................... . 114 Ashtrays ......................................... . 115 Ceiling Lights ................................ . 116 Courtesy Lights ............................ . 117 Instruments and Controls 55 Control Locations Instruments and Controls MIRROR CONTROLS (P. 96) (P. 83) (P. 98) (P. 103) (P. 88) (P. 205) (P. 206) CLIMATE CONTROL SYSTEM DOOR LOCK SWITCHES DRIVING POSITION MEMORY POWER WINDOW SWITCHES FUEL DOOR FILL RELEASE HANDLE (P. 120) AUDIO SYSTEM TRUNK RELEASE (P. 134, 151) BUTTON HOOD RELEASE HANDLE 56 ˎ Indicator Lights MALFUNCTION INDICATOR LAMP (P.59, 323) MAINTENANCE HIGH REQUIRED (P.66) INDICATOR INDICATOR (P.62) BEAM SIDE INDICATOR AIRBAG (P.59) CUTOFF ANTI-LOCK INDICATOR BRAKE (P.60) SYSTEM PARKING BRAKE AND BRAKE SYSTEM INDICATOR ˎ (P.58, 325) SUPPLEMENTAL SYSTEM INDICATOR RESTRAINT (P.59) VEHICLE STABILITY ASSIST SYSTEM INDICATOR (P.60) VSA INDICATOR ACTIVATION (P.60) CRUISE CONTROL INDICATOR (P.59) LOW OIL PRESSURE INDICATOR (P.58, 321) CHARGING INDICATOR SYSTEM (P.58, 322) DOOR AND TRUNK OPEN MONITOR (P.61) IMMOBILIZER SYSTEM INDICATOR (P.59) LOW INDICATOR FUEL (P.62) LIGHTS INDICATOR ON ˎ (P.59) BRAKE (P.61) LAMP INDICATOR SEAT BELT REMINDER LIGHT (P.58) The U.S. instrument panel is shown. Differences for the Canadian models are noted in the text. Instruments and Controls 57 Indicator Lights The instrument panel has many Low Oil Pressure indicators to give you important Indicator information about your car. Charging System This indicator comes on when you Indicator turn the ignition switch ON (II). It is a reminder to check the parking brake. Driving with the parking brake not fully released can damage the brakes and tires. If the indicator remains lit after you have fully released the parking brake while the engine is running, or if it comes on while driving, it can indicate a problem in the brake system. For complete information, see page . Instruments and Controls U.S. Canada The engine can be severely damaged if this light flashes or stays on when the engine is running. For complete information, see page . If this light comes on when the engine is running, the battery is not being charged. For complete information, see page . Parking Brake and Brake System Seat Belt Reminder Light Indicator 58 This light has two functions: If you do not fasten your seat belt, the beeper will stop after a few seconds but the light stays on until you do. Both the light and the beeper stay off if you fasten your seat belt before turning on the ignition. 321 This indicator lights when you turn the ignition switch ON (II). It is a 1. reminder to you and your passengers to protect yourselves by fastening the seat belts. A beeper also sounds if you have not fastened your seat belt. 322 2. 325 Lights On Indicator (U.S. models only) This indicator reminds you that the exterior lights are on. It comes on when the light switch is in either the or position. If you turn the ignition switch to ACCESSORY (I) or LOCK (0) without turning off the light switch, this indicator will remain on. A reminder chime will also sound when you open the driver’s door. This indicator will also come on when the light switch is in AUTO and the lights turn on automatically. Cruise Control Indicator This lights when you set the cruise control. See page 182 for information on operating the cruise control. Indicator Lights Immobilizer System Supplemental Restraint Indicator System Indicator This indicator comes on for a few This indicator lights when you turn seconds when you turn the ignition the ignition switch ON (II). If it switch ON (II). It will then go off if comes on at any other time, it you have inserted a properly-coded indicates a potential problem with ignition key. If it is not a properly- your front airbags. This light will coded key, the indicator will blink also alert you to a potential problem and the engine will not start (see with your side airbags, passenger’s page 80 ). side airbag automatic cutoff system or automatic seat belt tensioners. This indicator also blinks several For complete information, see page times when you turn the ignition 50 . switch from ON (II) to ACCESSORY (I) or LOCK (0). Side Airbag Cutoff Indicator Malfunction Indicator This indicator lights when you turn Lamp the ignition switch ON (II). If it See page 323 . comes on at any other time, it indicates that the passenger’s side airbag has automatically shut off. For complete information, see page 51 . Instruments and Controls 59 Indicator Lights Vehicle Stability Assist (VSA) System Indicator VSA Activation Indicator Anti-lock Brake System (ABS) Indicator 60 This light normally comes on for a few seconds when you turn the 1. ignition switch ON (II), and when the ignition switch is turned to START (III). If this light comes on at any other time, there is a problem in 2. the ABS. If this happens, take the vehicle to your dealer to have it checked. With the light on, your car 3. still has normal braking ability but no anti-lock. For complete information, see page . 227 This indicator normally comes on for This indicator has three functions: a few seconds when you turn the ignition switch to ON (II). It comes on as a reminder that you have turned off the Vehicle If this light comes on and stays on at Stability Assist (VSA) system. any other time, or it does not come on when you turn the ignition switch It flashes when VSA is active (see ON (II), there is a problem with the page 227 ). VSA system. Take the vehicle to your dealer to have it checked. Without VSA, your car still has normal driving ability, but will not 225 have VSA traction and stability enhancement. See page for more This indicator normally comes on for information on the VSA system. a few seconds when you turn the ignition switch to ON (II). See page 227 for more information on the VSA system. Instruments and Controls It comes on along with the VSA system indicator if there is a problem with the VSA system. Indicator Lights Brake Lamp Indicator Door and Trunk Open Monitor Turn Signal and Hazard Warning If a brake light does not work, the Indicators BRAKE LAMP indicator comes on The left or right turn signal light when you push the brake pedal with blinks when you signal a lane change the ignition switch ON (II). The appropriate light comes on in or turn. If the light does not blink or this display if the trunk or any door blinks rapidly, it usually means one A burned out brake light is a hazard is not closed tightly. of the turn signal bulbs is burned out when drivers behind you cannot tell (see page 291 ). Replace the bulb as you are braking. Have your brake All the lights in the monitor display soon as possible, since other drivers lights repaired right away. come on for a few seconds when you cannot see that you are signaling. turn the ignition switch to ON (II). When you turn on the Hazard Warning switch, both turn signal lights blink. All turn signals on the outside of the vehicle should flash. Instruments and Controls 61 Indicator Lights Low Fuel Indicator High Beam Indicator ‘‘Daytime Running Lights’’ Indicator This light comes on as a reminder This light comes on with the high that you must refuel soon. beam headlights. See page for information on the headlight controls. On Canadian models, this indicator comes on with reduced brightness when the Daytime Running Lights (DRL) are on (see page ). 62 Instruments and Controls Canadian models only 68 This indicator lights when you turn the ignition switch to ON (II) with the headlight switch off and the parking brake set. It should go off if you turn on the headlights or release the parking brake. If it comes on at any other time, it means there is a 70 problem with the DRL. There may also be a problem with the high beam headlights. Gauges Speedometer U.S. Models This shows your speed in miles per hour (mph). The smaller inner numbers are the speed in kilometers TACHOMETER SPEEDOMETER TEMPERATURE GAUGE SELECT BUTTON per hour (km/h). Canadian Models This shows your speed in kilometers per hour (km/h). The smaller inner numbers are the speed in miles per hour (mph). Tachometer The tachometer shows the engine speed in revolutions per minute (rpm). To protect the engine from damage, never drive with the tachometer needle in the red zone. MAINTENANCE REQUIRED INDICATOR ODOMETER FUEL GAUGE TRIP METER RESET BUTTON OUTSIDE TEMPERATURE INDICATOR Instruments and Controls 63 Gauges Odometer Trip Meter The odometer shows the total dis- tance your car has been driven. It measures miles in U.S. models and SELECT BUTTON kilometers in Canadian models. It is illegal under U.S. federal law and Canadian provincial regulations to disconnect, reset, or alter the odometer with the intent to change the number of miles or kilometers indicated. RESET BUTTON This meter shows the number of miles (U.S.) or kilometers (Canada) driven since you last reset it. 64 Instruments and Controls There are two trip meters: Trip A and Trip B. Switch between these displays by pressing the Select button repeatedly. Each trip meter works independently, so you can keep track of two different distances. When you turn the ignition switch ON (II), what you last selected is displayed. To reset a trip meter, display it, and then press and hold the Reset button until the number resets to ‘‘0.0’’. This indicator displays the outside temperature in Fahrenheit in U.S. models, and in Centigrade in Canadian models. The temperature sensor is located in the front bumper. Therefore, the temperature reading can be affected by heat reflection from the road sur- face, engine heat, and the exhaust from the surrounding traffic. This can cause the temperature reading not to be correct when your speed is under 19 mph (30 km/h). In certain weather conditions, temperature readings near freezing (32°F, 0°C) could mean that ice is forming on the road surface. Fuel Gauge Temperature Gauge Outside Temperature Indicator This shows the temperature of the engine’s coolant. During normal operation, the pointer should rise from the bottom white mark to about the middle of the gauge. In severe driving conditions, such as very hot weather or a long period of uphill driving, the pointer may rise to near the upper red mark. If it reaches the red (Hot) mark, pull safely to the side of the road. Turn to page for instructions and precautions on checking the engine’s cooling system. 319 Gauges This shows how much fuel you have. It is most accurate when the vehicle is on level ground. It may show slightly more or less than the actual amount when you are driving on curvy or hilly roads. The needle returns to the bottom after you turn off the ignition. The gauge shows the fuel level reading immediately after you turn the ignition switch back ON (II). Avoid driving with an extremely low f uel level. Running out of f uel could cause the engine to misf ire, damaging the catalytic converter. Instruments and Controls 65 Gauges Maintenance Required Indicator Your dealer will reset this indicator after completing the scheduled MAINTENANCE REQUIRED INDICATOR SELECT BUTTON maintenance. If this maintenance is done by someone other than your Acura dealer, reset the indicator as follows. Turn off the engine. RESET BUTTON For the first 6,000 miles (9,600 km) after the Maintenance Required Indicator is reset, it will come on for two seconds when you turn the ignition switch to ON (II). Instruments and Controls 1. 2. 3. 244 248 Press and hold the select and reset buttons next to the instrument pan- el, then turn the ignition switch ON (II). This indicator reminds you that it is Between 6,000 miles (9,600 km) and Hold the buttons for time to take your car in for 7,500 miles (12,000 km) this approximately ten seconds until scheduled maintenance. indicator will light for two seconds the indicator resets. Refer to the Maintenance Schedules when you first turn the ignition for Normal and Severe Driving switch to ON (II), and then flash for Conditions on pages ɻ . ten seconds. If you exceed 7,500 miles (12,000 km) without having the scheduled maintenance performed, this indicator will remain on as a constant reminder. 66 The two levers on the steering column contain controls for driving features you use most often. The left lever controls the turn signals, headlights, and high beams. The right lever controls the windshield washers and wipers. The switch for the hazard warning lights is on the dashboard to the right of the steering column. The controls under the left air vent are for the cruise control, instrument panel brightness and the VSA System. The switches for the rear window defogger and fog lights are under the audio system. The steering wheel adjustment switch on the side of the steering column allows you to tilt and telescope the steering wheel. Controls Near the Steering Wheel VEHICLE HEADLIGHTS/ HAZARD WARNING WINDSHIELD STABILITY TURN SIGNALS LIGHTS WIPERS/WASHERS ASSIST OFF SWITCH SYSTEM FOG LIGHTS CRUISE CONTROL INSTRUMENT PANEL BRIGHTNESS HORN STEERING WHEEL REAR WINDOW DEFOGGER ADJUSTMENTS Instruments and Controls 67 Controls Near the Steering Wheel Headlights If you leave the lights on with the ignition switch in ACCESSORY (I) or LOCK (0), you will hear a reminder chime when you open the driver’s door. The rotating switch on the left lever controls the lights. Turning this switch to the position turns on the parking lights, taillights, instrument panel lights, side marker lights, and rear license plate lights. Turning the switch to the position turns on the headlights. Instruments and Controls U.S. models only When the light switch is in either of these positions, the Lights On indicator comes on as a reminder. This light remains on if you leave the light switch on and turn the ignition switch to ACCESSORY (I) or LOCK (0). 68 To change between low beams and high beams, pull the turn signal lever until you hear a click, then let go. The blue high beam indicator will light (see page 62 ). Controls Near the Steering Wheel To flash the high beams, pull the Automatic Lighting Lights On indicator comes on as a turn signal lever back lightly, then reminder. The lights and indicator release it. The high beams will come on and go off. AUTO POSITION will turn off automatically when the system senses high ambient light. The high beams will stay on for as The lights will remain on when you long as you hold the lever back, no turn off the ignition switch. They will matter what position the headlight turn off automatically when you open switch is in. the driver’s door. To turn them on again, either turn the ignition switch to ON (II) or turn the light switch to . Even with the automatic lighting On U.S. models feature turned on, we recommend The Automatic Lighting feature that you turn on the lights manually turns on the headlights, all other when driving at night or in a dense exterior lights, and the instrument fog, or when you enter dark areas, panel lights when it senses low such as long tunnels or parking ambient light. structures. To turn on automatic lighting, turn the light switch to AUTO at any time. The lights will come on automatically when the outside light level becomes low (at dusk, for example). The CONTINUED Instruments and Controls 69 Controls Near the Steering Wheel Do not leave the light switch in AUTO if you will not be driving the vehicle for an extended period (a week or more). You should also turn off the lights if you plan to leave the engine idling or the engine off for a long time. This will prevent the battery from discharging. Instruments and Controls LIGHT SENSOR The automatic lighting feature is controlled by a sensor located on top of the dashboard. Do not cover this sensor or spill liquids on it. 70 With the headlight switch off, the high beam headlights come on with reduced brightness when you turn the ignition switch to ON (II) and release the parking brake. They remain on until you turn the ignition off, even if you set the parking brake. The headlights revert to normal operation when you turn them on with the switch. Daytime Running Lights (Canadian Models) Controls Near the Steering Wheel Instrument Panel Brightness To reduce glare at night, the instru- Turn Signals INSTRUMENT BRIGHTNESS DIAL PANEL ment panel illumination dims when you turn the light switch to or . Turning the instrument panel brightness control fully to the left, past the detent, will return the instru- ment panel to its full brightness. TURN SIGNAL LEVER The dial on the dashboard to the left Signal a turn or lane change with this of the instrument panel is used to lever. Push down on the lever to adjust the brightness of the lights in signal a left turn, and up to signal a the controls and displays. Turn the right turn. If you push it up or down dial to adjust the brightness. all the way, the turn signal continues to blink even when you release the lever. It shuts off automatically as you complete the turn. CONTINUED Instruments and Controls 71 Controls Near the Steering Wheel To signal a lane change, push lightly Fog Lights on the turn signal lever in the proper direction and hold it. The lever will return to the center position as soon as you release it. You can use the fog lights only when the headlights are on low beam. They will go off when you turn the headlights off or onto high beam. With the light switch in the AUTO position, you can also use the fog lights when the headlights turn on automatically. They will go off when the headlights turn off. Instruments and Controls Cars without Navigation System Turn the fog lights on and off by pressing the button. The indicator in the button lights to show the fog lights are on. U.S. models only 72 Controls Near the Steering Wheel Windshield Wipers You can vary how often the wipers sweep the windshield by turning the INT TIME ring next to the rotary switch. If you turn the INT TIME ring to the shortest delay, the wipers will change from intermittent to low speed operation when vehicle speed exceeds 12 mph (20 km/h). The right lever controls the wind- In intermittent, the wipers operate shield wipers and washers. The every few seconds. The sweep rotary switch at the end of the lever interval will change slightly with has three positions; speed; getting shorter as you drive INT: intermittent faster. In low speed and high speed, : low speed the wipers run continuously. : high speed CONTINUED Instruments and Controls 73 Controls Near the Steering Wheel Instruments and Controls Wiper Arms Winter Position The windshield wiper arms have two parked positions: Winter and WIPER ARMS Summer. In the winter position, the arms sit slightly above the edge of the hood. This reduces the possibili- ty of damage to the wiper arms or windshield wiper motor by a build-up of snow and ice. Adjust the wiper arms to the winter position by grasping either arm near the pivot. Pull on the arm, parallel to the windshield, until it locks in the A heavy build-up of snow or ice on To operate the wipers in mist mode, higher position. Push the arm in the the wiper arms will cause them to push the control lever down. The other direction to return the wipers automatically park in the winter wipers run at high speed until you to the summer position. position. release the lever. This gives you a quick way to clear the windshield. 74 Controls Near the Steering Wheel Windshield Washers Hazard Warning Cars without Navigation System To clean the windshield, pull back on Push the red button to turn on the the wiper control lever. The washers hazard warning lights (four-way spray until you release the lever. The flashers). This causes all four wipers run at low speed while you’re outside turn signals and both pulling the lever, then complete one indicators in the instrument panel to more sweep of the windshield after flash. Use the hazard warning lights you release it. if you need to park in a dangerous area near heavy traffic, or if your car is disabled. Instruments and Controls 75 Controls Near the Steering Wheel Rear Window Defogger Steering Wheel Adjustments 17 Your Acura’s steering wheel is electrically-adjustable for angle and distance. The adjustment switch is on the left side of the steering column. Always adjust the steering wheel before you begin driving. Make sure the rear window is clear and you have good visibility before starting to drive. The defogger and antenna wires on the inside of the rear window can be accidentally damaged. When cleaning the glass, always wipe side to side. Instruments and Controls See page for important safety information about how to properly position the steering wheel. Cars without Navigation System The rear window defogger will clear Adjusting the steering wheel fog, frost, and thin ice from the position while driving may window. Push the defogger button to cause you to lose control of the turn it on and off. The light in the vehicle and be seriously injured button lights to show the defogger is in a crash. on. If you do not turn it off, the defogger will shut itself off after Adjust the steering wheel only about 25 minutes. It also shuts off when the vehicle is stopped. when you turn off the ignition. You have to turn it on again when you restart the vehicle. 76 Controls Near the Steering Wheel Automatic Movement 1. Locate the adjustment switch on 2. Release the switch when the AUTO SWITCH the left side of the steering column. steering wheel reaches the The AUTO switch controls automat- Move the steering wheel, in, out, desired position. Make sure the ic movement of the steering wheel. up, or down by pushing and steering wheel points towards When this switch is in the ON posi- holding the adjustment switch in your chest, not toward your face, tion, the steering wheel automatical- that direction. and that you can see the ly moves fully in and up when you re- instrument panel gauges and move the key from the ignition warning lights. switch. CONTINUED Instruments and Controls 77 Controls Near the Steering Wheel The steering wheel then returns to its original position when you insert the key back in the ignition switch. Steering wheel movement is also controlled by the Driving Position Memory System (see page ).98 78 Instruments and Controls Your car comes with two master keys and a valet key. The master key fits all the locks on your car: • Ignition • Doors • Trunk • Trunk pass-through cover • Glove box Keys KEY NUMBER TAG MASTER KEYS (Black) The valet key works only in the ignition and the door locks. You can keep the trunk, trunk pass-through cover, and glove box locked when you leave your car and the valet key at a parking facility. You should have received a key number tag with your keys. You will need this key number if you ever have to get a lost key replaced. Keep the tag stored in a safe place. If you VALET KEY (Gray) Keys and Locks need to replace a key, use only an Acura-approved key blank. These keys contain electronic circuits that are activated by the Immobilizer System. They will not work to start the engine if the circuits are damaged. Protect the keys from direct sunlight, high temperature, and high humidity. Do not drop the keys or set heavy objects on them. Keep the keys away from liquids. If they get wet, dry them immediately with a soft cloth. The keys do not contain batteries. Do not try to take them apart. CONTINUED Instruments and Controls 79 Keys and Locks 80 Remote Transmitter Immobilizer System Your car also comes with two remote The Immobilizer System protects transmitters; see page 84 for an your car from theft. A properly- explanation of the operation. coded master or valet key must be used in the ignition switch for the Learning Key engine to start. If an improperly- You should also receive a small case coded key (or other device) is used, containing a learning key. It is used the engine’s fuel system is disabled. by the Acura dealer to code replace- ment keys to your car’s Immobilizer When you turn the ignition switch to System. It must not be used in your ON (II), the Immobilizer System car’s ignition switch. Store the learn- indicator should come on for a few ing key with the key number plate in seconds, then go out. If the indicator a safe place. If you attempt to use the learning starts to blink, it means the system key to start your car’s engine, it may does not recognize the coding of the cause a malfunction in the system key. Turn the ignition switch to that makes your master and valet LOCK (0), remove the key, reinsert keys unusable. If this happens, you it, and turn the switch to ON (II) should contact your Acura dealer. again. If you need a new key made, take the key number plate, the learning key, and all other keys that came with your car to your Acura dealer. Instruments and Controls The system may not recognize your Do not attempt to alter this system key’s coding if another immobilizer or add other devices to it. Electrical key or other metal object is near the problems could result that may make ignition switch when you insert the your car undriveable. key. To make sure the system recognizes the key code: If you have lost your key and you cannot start the engine, contact your Do not keep other immobilizer Acura dealer. keys on the same key ring. Use a plastic or leather key fob, not metal. Keep other keys away from your car’s key and the ignition switch while trying to start the engine. If the system repeatedly does not recognize the coding of your key, contact your Acura dealer. The Immobilizer System indicator will also blink several times when you turn the ignition switch from ON (II) to ACCESSORY (I) or LOCK (0). Keys and Locks As required by the FCC: This device complies with Part 15 of the FCC rules. Operation is subject to the following two conditions: (1) This device may not cause harmful interference, and (2) this device must accept any interference received, including interference that may cause undesired operation. Changes or modifications not expressly approved by the party responsible for compliance could void the user’s authority to operate the equipment. This device complies with Industry Canada Standard RSS-210. Operation is subject to the following two conditions: (1) this device may not cause interference, and (2) this device must accept any interference that may cause undesired operation of the device. Instruments and Controls 81 Keys and Locks Ignition Switch LOCK (0) ɻ You can insert or from ACCESSORY to ON. remove the key only in this position. To switch from ACCESSORY to START (III) ɻ LOCK, you must push the key in slightly as you turn it. The shift lever must also be in Park. The anti-theft lock will lock the steering column when you remove the key. 80 ACCESSORY (I) ON (II) ɻ Instruments and Controls Use this position only to start the engine. The switch returns to ON (II) when you let go of the key. The engine will not start if the Immobilizer System does not If the front wheels are turned, the recognize the key’s coding (see page anti-theft lock may sometimes make ). it difficult to turn the key from LOCK to ACCESSORY. Firmly turn You will hear a reminder beeper if the steering wheel to the left or to you leave the key in the ignition The ignition switch is on the right the right as you turn the key. switch in the LOCK (0) or side of the steering column. It has ACCESSORY (I) position and open four positions: ɻ In this position, the driver’s door. Remove the key to • LOCK (0) you can operate the audio system turn off the beeper. • ACCESSORY (I) and the cigarette lighter. • ON (II) • START (III) This is the normal key position when driving. All features and accessories on the vehicle are usable. Several of the lights on the instrument panel come on as a test when you turn the ignition switch 82 Each front door has a master door lock switch. Either switch locks and unlocks all doors. Push the switch down to lock all doors, and up to unlock them. Power Door Locks MASTER DOOR LOCK SWITCH LOCK TAB Each door has a lock tab at the top of the door. When you push down the lock tab on the driver’s door, all doors lock. Pulling up the lock tab on the driver’s door only unlocks that door. The lock tab on each passenger’s door only locks and unlocks that door. Keys and Locks To lock any passenger’s door when getting out of the vehicle, push the lock tab down and close the door. To lock the driver’s door, remove the key from the ignition switch and push the lock tab down or push the master switch down, then close the door. All doors can be locked from the outside by using the key in either front door. To unlock only the driver’s door from the outside, insert the key in the driver’s door lock, turn the key and release it. If you turn the key and hold it, all doors will unlock. All four doors will unlock when you unlock the passenger’s door with the key. CONTINUED Instruments and Controls 83 Keys and Locks Lockout Prevention Remote Transmitter If you forget and leave the key in the ignition switch, Lockout Prevention will not allow you to lock the driver’s door. With the driver’s door open and the key in the ignition, both master door lock switches are disabled. However, if the driver’s door is not open, the master door lock switches are not disabled. Pushing the switch down on the open passenger’s door will lock all doors. If you try to lock an open driver’s door by pushing in the lock tab, the tabs on all doors pop out. Pushing in the lock tab on the passenger’s door only locks that door. Instruments and Controls LED LOCK BUTTON UNLOCK BUTTON TRUNK RELEASE BUTTON PANIC BUTTON You can lock and unlock your car with the remote transmitter. When you push the LOCK button, all doors lock. You will hear a beep, and the parking lights, taillights and license plate lights will flash once. 84 The ceiling lights (if the ceiling light switch is in the center position) and the door courtesy lights will come on when you press the UNLOCK button. If you do not open any door, the lights stay on for about 10 seconds, then fade out. If you relock the doors with the remote transmitter before 10 seconds have elapsed, the lights will go off immediately. When you push the UNLOCK button once, only the driver’s door unlocks. The remaining doors unlock when you push the button a second time. You will hear two beeps, and the outside lights will flash twice, each time you push the button. If you unlock the doors with the remote transmitter, but do not open any of the doors within 30 seconds, the doors automatically relock and the security system sets. You cannot lock any of the doors with the remote transmitter if any door is not fully closed or the key is in the ignition switch. You cannot unlock any of the doors with the key in the ignition switch. To open the trunk, push the Trunk Release button for approximately one second. You can open the trunk with the remote transmitter regardless of the position of the main switch in the glove box. The trunk will not open if the key is in the ignition switch. Keys and Locks Turning the Beep Off and On Panic Mode You can program the keyless entry Panic mode allows you to remotely system so it does not beep when you activate your car’s security system to lock and unlock the doors. This attract attention. When activated, the procedure only turns off the beep; horn will sound, and the exterior the exterior lights will still flash. lights will flash, for about 30 seconds. To activate panic mode, press and To turn this feature off, stand near hold the PANIC button for about two the vehicle with the remote seconds. transmitter. Press and hold the Trunk Release button, then press the To cancel Panic mode before 30 Lock button within one second. You seconds, press any button on the should see the LED on the remote remote transmitter. You can also transmitter come on for one second. turn the ignition switch to ON (II). Release the buttons after the LED goes out. Panic mode will not activate if the ignition switch is in the ON (II) To turn this feature on, repeat the position. above procedure. You should see the LED blink twice. After you program the remote transmitter, make sure the trunk lid is closed. CONTINUED Instruments and Controls 85 Keys and Locks 86 Replacing the Battery Remove the old battery and note the polarity. Make sure the polarity of the new battery is the same ( side facing up), then insert it in the transmitter. Instruments and Controls ɻ To replace the battery, place a cloth on the edge of the transmitter and remove the upper half by carefully prying on the edge with a small flat- tip screwdriver. Snap the two halves of the transmitter case back together. When the remote transmitter’s battery begins to get weak, it may take several pushes on the button to lock or unlock the doors, and the LED will get dim. Replace the battery as soon as possible. Battery type: CR2025 Keys and Locks Transmitter Care As required by the FCC: Childproof Door Locks Avoid severe shock to the trans- This device complies with Part 15 of the mitter, such as dropping or throwing FCC rules. Operation is subject to the it. Also, protect it from extreme hot following two conditions: (1) This device or cold temperatures. may not cause harmful interference, and (2) this device must accept any Clean the transmitter case with a interference received, including soft cloth. Do not use strong interference that may cause undesired cleaners or solvents that could harm operation. the case. Immersing the transmitter in any liquid will harm the trans- Changes or modifications not expressly mitter and cause it to not function approved by the party responsible for properly. compliance could void the user’s LEVER authority to operate the equipment. If you lose a transmitter, you will The childproof door locks are need to have the replacement This device complies with Industry designed to prevent children seated programmed to your car’s system by Canada Standard RSS-210. in the rear from accidentally opening your Acura dealer. Any other Operation is subject to the following two the rear doors. Each rear door has a transmitters you have will also need conditions: (1) this device may not cause lock lever near the edge. With the to be reprogrammed. interference, and (2) this device must lever in the LOCK position, the door accept any interference that may cause cannot be opened from the inside undesired operation of the device. regardless of the position of the lock tab. To open the door, pull the lock tab up and use the outside door handle. Instruments and Controls 87 Keys and Locks Trunk Carbon Monoxide Hazard 88 Instruments and Controls MASTER KEY TRUNK RELEASE BUTTON TRUNK MAIN SWITCH You can open the trunk in three To close the trunk, press down on To protect items in the trunk when ways: the trunk lid. you need to give the key to someone else: Press the trunk release button on See page 212 for cargo loading and the driver’s door. weight limit information. Keep the Disable the trunk release button Use the master key to open the trunk lid closed at all times while on the driver’s door by turning off trunk lock. The valet key does not driving to avoid damaging the lid, the trunk main switch in the glove work in this lock. and to prevent exhaust gas from box. Press and hold the trunk release getting into the interior. See button on the remote transmitter on page . for approximately one second (see page ). 1. 53 85 Emergency 2. Trunk Opener 3. 4. Lock the glove box with the master key. Make sure the trunk pass-through cover is locked (see page 95 ). Give the person the valet key. Even if the trunk main switch is turned off, you can open the trunk with the master key or the remote transmitter. As a safety feature, your car has a release lever on the trunk latch so the trunk can be opened from the inside. To open the trunk, push the release lever to the left. Keys and Locks Parents should decide if their children should be shown how to use this feature. For more information about child safety, see page 24 . Instruments and Controls 89 Keys and Locks Glove Box Open the glove box by pulling the bottom of the handle. Close it with a firm push. Lock or unlock the glove box with the master key. The glove box light comes on only when the parking lights are on. 90 Instruments and Controls An open glove box can cause serious injury to your passenger in a crash, even if the passenger is wearing the seat belt. Always keep the glove box closed while driving. Seat Adjustments See pages 12 ɻ 14 for important safety Driver’s Seat Adjustments information and warnings about how to properly position seats and seat-backs. Make all seat adjustments before you start driving. Your Acura has power adjustments for both front seats. The two power seat adjustment switches are on the outside edge of the seat bottom. You can adjust the power seats with the ignition switch in any position. The long horizontal switch adjusts Pull up or push down on the front of the seat bottom in several directions. the switch to move the seat bottom’s The short vertical switch adjusts the front edge up or down. Pull up or seat-back angle. push down on the rear of the switch to move the rear of the seat bottom Push the horizontal switch forward up or down. or backward to move the seat forward or backward. CONTINUED Instruments and Controls 91 Seat Adjustments Instruments and Controls The driver’s seat includes a memory feature. Two seat positions can be stored in separate memories. You can then select a memorized position by pushing the appropriate memory button. Refer to page for how to memorize and select the seat positions. Pull the center of the horizontal switch up to raise the seat. Push it down to lower the seat. 98 Adjust the seat-back angle by pushing the rear switch in the direction you want to move. 92 Seat Adjustments Instruments and Controls Driver’s Lumbar Support Front Passenger’s Seat Adjustments ɻ See pages 12 14 for important safety information and warnings about how to properly position seats and seat-backs. Make all seat adjustments before you start driving. You can adjust the seat with the ignition switch in any position. The seat adjustment switches are on Vary the lumbar support by pushing the outside edge of the seat bottom. the switch on the outside edge of the Push the long horizontal switch seat bottom. Push the switch to forward or backward to move the adjust the lumbar support through seat bottom in that direction. its full range. Adjust the seat-back angle by pushing the vertical switch in the direction you want to move. 93 Seat Adjustments Head Restraints See page 14 for important safety information and a warning about how to properly position the head restraints. The head restraints help protect you and your passengers from whiplash and other injuries. They are most effective when you adjust them so the back of the occupant’s head rests against the center of the restraint. A taller person should adjust the restraint as high as possible. 94 Instruments and Controls To remove a head restraint for cleaning or repair, pull it up as far as it will go. Push the release button and pull the restraint out of the seat- back. RELEASE BUTTON The head restraints adjust for height and tilt. You need both hands to adjust the restraint. Do not attempt to adjust it while driving. To raise it, pull upward. To lower the restraint, push the release button sideways and push the restraint down. To adjust the tilt, pivot the head restraint to the desired position. Seat Adjustments Rear Seat Armrest Trunk Pass-through Cover Make sure all items in the trunk and KNOB those extending through the pass- through are secured. For security, this cover can be locked and unlocked only with the master key. To lock the cover, insert the key and turn it clockwise. Never drive with this cover open and the trunk lid open. See Carbon Monoxide Hazard on LID page 53 . The rear seat armrest is located at The trunk pass-through cover can be the center of the rear seat. Pivot it opened from either side; it folds down to use it. forward onto the center armrest. Open the cover by sliding the knob downward and pushing or pulling on the cover. To close the cover, swing it up and push firmly on the top. Make sure it latches properly. Instruments and Controls 95 Mirrors Keep the inside and outside mirrors clean and adjusted for best visibility. SENSOR INDICATOR Be sure to adjust the mirrors before you start driving. AUTO BUTTON The inside mirror can automatically darken to reduce glare. To turn on this feature, press the button on the bottom of the mirror. The AUTO indicator comes on as a reminder. When it is on, the mirror darkens when it senses the headlights of a vehicle behind you, then returns to normal visibility when the lights are gone. Press the button again to turn off this sensor. 96 Instruments and Controls Adjust the outside mirrors with the adjustment button on the driver’s door armrest: 1. Turn the ignition switch ON (II). 2. Move the selector switch to L (driver’s side) or R (passenger’s side). Adjusting the Power Mirrors SELECTOR SWITCH When you finish, move the selector switch to the center (off) position. This turns off the adjustment button so you can’t move a mirror out of position by accidentally bumping the button. Move the mirror right, left, up or down by pushing the adjustment button in that direction. 4. 3. Outside mirror positions can be stored in the driving position memory system (see page 98 ). ADJUSTMENT BUTTON Mirrors HEATED MIRROR BUTTON The outside mirrors are heated to re- move fog and frost. With the ignition switch ON (II), turn on the heaters by pressing the button. The light in the button comes on as a reminder. Press the button again to turn the heaters off. Instruments and Controls 97 Driving Position Memory System Your Acura has a memory feature for the steering wheel, driver’s seat, Storing a Driving Position in Memory Store a driving position as explained MEMO BUTTON and outside mirror positions. in this section only when the vehicle is parked. Two seat, steering wheel, and outside mirror positions for different 1. Turn the ignition switch ON (II). drivers or driving conditions can be You cannot add a new driving stored in separate memories. You position in the memory unless the select a memorized position by ignition switch is ON (II). You can pushing the appropriate button. recall a memorized position with the ignition switch in any position. 2. Adjust the seat to a comfortable position (see page 91 ). Adjust 3. Press and release the MEMO the steering wheel to a button on the control panel. You comfortable position (see page will hear a beep. Immediately 76 ). Adjust the outside mirrors press and hold one of the memory for best visibility (see page 96 ). buttons (1 or 2) until you hear two beeps. The indicator light in the memory button will come on. The current positions of the driver’s seat, steering wheel, and outside mirrors are now stored. 98 Instruments and Controls Driving Position Memory System Doing any of the following after Selecting a Memorized Position 3. Press the desired memory button pressing the MEMO button will (1 or 2) until you hear a beep, then cancel the storing procedure. MEMORY BUTTONS release the button. Not pressing a memory button The system will move the seat, within 5 seconds. steering wheel and outside mirrors to the memorized positions. The Readjusting the seat or steering indicator light in the selected position. memory button will flash during movement. When the adjustments Readjusting the outside mirror are complete, you will hear two position. beeps and the indicator light will remain on. Each memory button stores only one driving position. Storing a new You can select memorized positions position erases the previous setting as follows. stored in that button’s memory. If you want to add a new position while 1. Make sure the parking brake is set retaining the current one, use the and the shift lever is in Park. other memory button. 2. Insert the key in the ignition All stored driving positions will be switch. If you do not insert the key lost if your car’s battery goes dead or in the ignition switch, the steering is disconnected. wheel will not adjust to the memorized position until you do. CONTINUED Instruments and Controls 99 Driving Position Memory System, Seat Heaters To stop the system’s automatic ad- If desired, you can use the adjust- justment; ment switches to change the posi- tions of the seat, steering wheel or Press any button on the control outside mirrors after they are in panel: MEMO, 1 or 2. their memorized position. If you Push any of the adjustment change the memorized position, the switches for the seat or steering indicator light in the memory button wheel. will go out. To keep this driving Shift out of Park. position for later use, you must store Adjust the outside mirrors. it in the driving position memory. If you select a memorized position without inserting the key in the ignition switch, only the seat and outside mirrors will adjust. To get the system to also adjust the steering wheel, insert the key in the ignition switch. You will hear two beeps when it is complete. 100 Instruments and Controls Both front seats are equipped with seat heaters. The ignition switch must be ON (II) to use them. Push the front of the switch, HI, to rapidly heat up the seat. After the seat reaches a comfortable temperature, select LO by pushing the back of the switch. This will keep the seat warm. Seat Heaters SEAT HEATERS Follow The HI or LO indicator lights and these precautions whenever remains lit until you turn it off by you use the seat heaters: pushing the opposite side of the switch lightly. The indicator will turn Use the HI setting only to heat the off. seats quickly. Select the LO setting when the seats feel warm. In HI, the heater turns off when the The HI setting draws large seat gets warm, and turns back on amounts of current from the after the seat’s temperature drops. It battery. continues to cycle as long as you leave it set on HI. The HI indicator Do not use the seat heaters, even remains lit as a reminder that you on the LO setting, if the engine is have the heater on. left idling for an extended period. They can weaken the battery, In LO, the heater runs continuously. causing hard starting. It does not cycle with temperature changes. Because of the sensors for the side airbag system, there is no heater in the passenger’s seat-back. Seat Heaters, Ski Sleeve Ski Sleeve The ski sleeve allows you to carry skis or other long objects safely without soiling or damaging the interior of your car. It attaches to the trunk pass-through. KNOB LID To use the ski sleeve: 1. Pull down the rear seat armrest. Open the trunk pass-through cover by sliding the knob down- ward and pulling on the cover. CONTINUED Instruments and Controls 101 Ski Sleeve Instruments and Controls Follow these precautions when you use the ski sleeve: Use the strap on the ski sleeve to secure it tightly to the rear seat armrest. Attach the ski sleeve to the trunk pass-through. Load the skis into the ski sleeve from the trunk. Make sure the tip of the ski sleeve is resting on the center console. Do not transport skis that are longer or heavier than these limits: Maximum length: 84 in (215 cm) Maximum weight: 55 lbs (25 kg) 5. 4. After use, make sure the ski sleeve is dry both inside and out before folding it up for storage. This will help to prevent mildew. 2. Open the trunk. Remove the ski sleeve from its storage bag. 3. 102 Power Windows Your car’s windows are electrically- powered. Turn the ignition switch to DRIVER’S WINDOW SWITCH ON (II) to raise or lower any window. Closing a power window on someone’s hands or fingers can Each door has a switch that controls cause serious injury. its window. To open the window, push the switch down and hold it. Make sure your passengers are Release the switch when you want away from the windows before the window to stop. Close the closing them. window by pulling back on the switch and holding it. MAIN SWITCH The driver’s door armrest has a master power window control panel. To open any of the passenger’s win- dows, push down on the appropriate switch and hold it until the window reaches the desired position. To close the window, pull back on the window switch. Release the switch when the window gets to the position you want. CONTINUED Instruments and Controls 103 Power Windows The master control panel also con- tains these extra features: AUTO ɻ To open the driver’s window fully, push the window switch firmly down, then release it. The window automatically goes down all the way. To stop the window from going all the way down, pull back on the window switch briefly. To close the driver’s window fully, pull back the window switch firmly, then release it. The window automatically goes all the way up. To stop the window from going all the way up, push down on the window switch briefly. To open or close the driver’s window partially, push down or pull back on the window switch lightly and hold it. The window will stop when you release the switch. 104 Instruments and Controls The MAIN switch controls power to the passenger’s window. With this switch off, the passenger’s window cannot be raised or lowered. The MAIN switch does not affect the driv- er’s window. Keep the MAIN switch off when you have children in the vehicle so they do not injure them- selves by operating the window unin- tentionally. The lights inside the switches come on when you turn the parking lights or headlights on. If the driver’s window runs into any obstacle while it is closing automatically, it will stop, and then reverse direction. To close the window, remove the obstacle, then use the window switch again. Auto reverse stops sensing when the window is almost closed. You should always check that all passengers and objects are away from the window before closing it. Auto Reverse Power Windows, Moonroof If your car’s battery is disconnected The power window system has a key- Moonroof or goes dead, or the driver’s window off delay function. The windows will fuse is removed, the AUTO function still operate for up to ten minutes will be disabled. The power window after you turn off the ignition. OPEN/CLOSE SWITCH system needs to be reset after Opening either front door cancels reconnecting the battery or installing the delay function. You must turn the fuse. You should do the following. the ignition switch ON (II) again before you can raise or lower the 1. Start the engine. Push down on windows. the driver’s window switch until the window is fully open. 2. Pull back on the driver’s window switch to close the window completely then hold the switch There are two switches on the for a further second or two more. ceiling near the front ceiling light. The ignition switch must be ON (II). If the power windows do not operate properly after resetting, have your To open the moonroof, pull the car checked by an Acura dealer. OPEN/CLOSE switch backward and hold it until the moonroof reaches the desired position. CONTINUED Instruments and Controls 105 Moonroof To close the moonroof, push the The moonroof has an AUTO OPEN/CLOSE switch forward and function. To open the moonroof fully, hold it. The moonroof will not close pull the OPEN/CLOSE switch TILT-UP SWITCH completely; it will stop about 5.1 backward firmly until it clicks, then inches (130 mm) away from being release it. The moonroof opens closed. Make sure your passengers automatically all the way. To stop the are clear of the moonroof, then moonroof from opening all the way, release the switch and push it push the switch forward briefly. To forward again to close the moonroof open the moonroof partially, pull the completely. OPEN/CLOSE switch backward lightly and hold it until the moonroof reaches the desired position. The AUTO function only works to open Opening or closing the the moonroof. moonroof on someone’s hands When you push and hold the TILT- or fingers can cause serious UP switch, the rear of the moonroof injury. will tilt up. To close it, push the OPEN/CLOSE switch forward. If Make sure all hands and fingers you pull the switch backward and are clear of the moonroof hold it, the moonroof will tilt down before opening or closing it. and then open. The AUTO function cannot work with the moonroof in the tilt up position. 106 Instruments and Controls RELEASE LEVER If you try to open the moonroof in below-f reezing temperatures, or when it is covered with snow or ice, you can damage the moonroof panel or motor. Driving the vehicle with the parking brake applied can damage the rear brakes and axles. To apply the parking brake, depress the pedal fully. To release it, pull the release lever. The parking brake light on the instrument panel should go out when the parking brake is fully released with the engine running (see page ). If you try to drive the vehicle without releasing the parking brake, the ABS indicator may come on, and the ABS may not work properly. The VSA system indicator will also come on along Parking Brake Moonroof, Parking Brake with the ABS indicator (see page 225 ). PARKING BRAKE PEDAL 58 Instruments and Controls 107 Digital Clock Instruments and Controls Press and hold the HOUR button until the hour advances to the desired hour. The digital clock displays the time with the ignition switch ON (II). To see the time with the ignition off, press and hold the wide button to the right of the clock. 3. 4. 1. HOUR MIN. RESET Press and hold the MIN. button until the numbers advance to the desired time. You can use the RESET button to quickly set the time to the nearest hour. If the displayed time is before the half hour, pressing the RESET button sets the clock back to the Cars without Navigation System To set the clock: previous hour. If the displayed time is after the half hour, pressing the Turn the ignition switch ON (II) to RESET button sets the clock for- display the time. ward to the beginning of the next hour. 2. Swing down the front cover of the wide button to the right of the clock display. You will see HOUR, MIN., and RESET buttons. For example: 1:06 would RESET to 1:00. 1:52 would RESET to 2:00. 108 Sunglasses Holder You may also store small items in Push this holder. Make sure they are small enough to let the holder close and latch, and that they are not heavy enough to cause the holder to pop open while driving. SUNGLASSES HOLDER Cars without Navigation System Some larger styles of sunglasses To open the sunglasses holder, push may not fit in the holder. on the front edge. It will unlatch and swing down. To close it, push it until it latches. Make sure the holder is closed while you are driving. Instruments and Controls 109 Beverage Holder To use the front beverage holder, push on the lid. The beverage holder will pop out. To close it, push it until it latches. 110 Instruments and Controls Be careful when you are using the beverage holder. A spilled liquid that is very hot can scald you or your passengers. Spilled liquids can also damage the upholstery, carpeting, and electrical components in the interior. The rear seat also has a beverage holder in the center armrest. To use it, pivot the armrest down. Console Compartment, Coin Box Console Compartment Coin Box ARMREST PAD LEVER CONSOLE COMPARTMENT COIN BOX To open the console compartment, You can put small items in the tray The coin box is located under the air pull the lever and lift the lid. located in the console compartment vent. To open the coin box, push on lid. To use the tray, lift the armrest the front. To close it, push it in until To close, lower the lid and push it pad. it clicks. down until it latches. Instruments and Controls 111 Sun Visor, Vanity Mirror Sun Visor Make sure you put the sun visor Vanity Mirror back in place when you are getting into or out of the vehicle. Do not use the sun visor extension over the rear view mirror. EXTENSION To use the sun visor, pull it down. To use a vanity mirror on the back of You can also use the sun visor at the the sun visor, pull up the cover. side window. Remove the support rod from the clip and swing the sun The light beside the mirror comes visor toward the side window. In this on when you pull up the cover. position, the sun visor can be extended by sliding out the extension. 112 Instruments and Controls The accessory power socket is located in the console compartment. To use the accessory power socket, pull down on the cover. The ignition switch must be in ACCESSORY (I) or ON (II). ACCESSORY POWER SOCKET Accessory Power Socket This socket is intended to supply power for 12 volt DC accessories NOTCH that are rated 120 watts or less (10 amps). It will not power an automotive type cigarette lighter element. Route the wire through the notch in the edge of the console compartment. Instruments and Controls 113 Cigarette Lighter Push CIGARETTE LIGHTER The cigarette lighter is next to the The ignition switch must be in front ashtray under the ashtray lid. ACCESSORY (I) or ON (II) for the Open the lid by pushing on it. cigarette lighter to work. To heat up the lighter, push it in. It will pop out when it is ready for use. Do not hold the lighter in while it is heating up, you could cause it to overheat. 114 Instruments and Controls Open the front ashtray by pushing on the lid. To close the ashtray, push it in until it clicks shut. To remove it for emptying, grasp the tab on the left side of the inner tray and lift it up and out. INNER TRAY ASHTRAY TAB The rear ashtrays are in the front lower corner of each door. Open the ashtray by swinging the upper edge of the lid down. To remove the ashtray for emptying, open it, then lift up and out. Ashtrays Use the ashtray only f or cigarettes, cigars, and other smoking materials. To prevent a possible f ire and damage to your car, don’t put paper or other things that can burn in the ashtray. Instruments and Controls 115 Ceiling Lights OFF ON Instruments and Controls FRONT REAR right), Both front and rear ceiling lights the main lights stay on contain a main light as well as two continuously. spotlights. Turn on the spotlights in the front and rear ceiling lights by pushing the button next to each light. Push the button again to turn it off. You can use the front spotlights at all times. The rear spotlights only light when the parking lights or headlights are on. With the light switch in the AUTO position, you can use the rear spotlights only when the headlights The front ceiling light has a three- turn on automatically. position switch. With the switch in the OFF position (far left), the main lights do not come on. In the center position, the main lights come on when you open any door. After all doors are closed tightly, they dim slightly then fade out in about 10 seconds. In the ON position (far U.S. models only 116 In addition to the ceiling lights, your Acura has courtesy lights in each door and the ignition switch. The door courtesy lights come on whenever you open any door. After all doors are closed tightly, they dim slightly then fade out in about 10 seconds. Courtesy Lights Even if the door is open, the lights will turn off after three minutes when the key is not in the ignition switch or the ignition switch is in the LOCK (0) or ACCESSORY (I) position, and the light switch is in the off position. The door courtesy lights and ceiling lights (with the switch in the center position) come on when you unlock the door with the key, lock tab on the driver’s door, master door lock switch, or remote transmitter (see page ). If you relock the driver’s door or close the driver’s door with the key in the ignition switch, the lights turn off immediately. Otherwise, they remain on, then fade out in about 10 seconds. Instruments and Controls 117 The door courtesy lights and ceiling lights (with the switch in the center position) also come on when you remove the key from the ignition switch. If you do not open a door, they stay on, then fade out in about 10 seconds. 84 The courtesy light in the ignition switch comes on when you open the driver’s door. It remains on about 10 seconds after the door is closed. 118 ............... Climate Control System . 120 3.5 RL without Navigation System Fully-automatic Operation ....... . 122 Semi-automatic Operation ....... . 123 U.S. 3.5 RL with Navigation System Fully-automatic Operation ....... . 127 Semi-automatic Operation ....... . 128 Rear Ventilation ........................ . 132 Sunlight Sensor/ Temperature Sensor ............ . 133 Audio System ................................ . 134 3.5 RL without Navigation System AM/FM/Cassette/CD Changer Audio System ........................ . 134 Operating the Radio ................. . 135 Adjusting the Sound ................. . 138 Audio System Lighting ............ . 138 Operating the Cassette Player ..................................... . 139 Tape Search Functions ............ . 140 Operating the CD Changer ..... . 143 CD Changer Error Indications ............................. . 150 Comfort and Convenience Features U.S. 3.5 RL with Navigation System Cruise Control ............................... . 182 AM/FM/Cassette/CD Changer/ HomeLink Universal Satellite Digital Radio Audio Transceiver ........................... . 186 System ................................ . 151 Customer Assistance ............... . 186 Operating the Radio ................. . 152 Important Safety Precautions . . 186 Adjusting the Sound ................. . 155 Training HomeLink .................. . 187 Audio System Lighting ............ . 155 Training with a Rolling Code Radio Frequencies .................... . 156 System .................................... . 189 Radio Reception ........................ . 156 Erasing Codes ........................... . 191 Digital Clock .............................. . 158 OnStar ............................................ . 192 Operating the Cassette Player ..................................... . 159 Tape Search Functions ............ . 160 Caring for the Cassette Player ..................................... . 163 Operating the CD Changer ..... . 164 Protecting Compact Discs ....... . 171 CD Changer Error Indications ............................. . 172 Satellite Digital Radio ............... . 173 Operating Satellite Radio ......... . 174 Receiving Satellite Radio Service .................................... . 177 Remote Audio Controls ........... . 178 Theft Protection ....................... . 180 Security System ............................ . 181 Comfort and Convenience Features 119 Climate Control System The automatic climate control system in your Acura picks the proper combination of air condi- tioning, heating, and ventilation to maintain the interior temperature you select. The system also adjusts the fan speed and air flow levels. The direction of air flow from the vents in the center and each side of the dashboard is adjustable. Move the tab in the center of each vent up- and-down and side-to-side. The side vents can be opened and closed with the dials next to them. 120 For the climate control system to provide heating and cooling, the engine must be running. In the rear seat, you can also adjust the ventilation when the climate con- trol system is on (see page ).132 Comfort and Convenience Features CENTER VENTS SIDE VENTS Open Close The climate control system draws air through the exterior vents at the bottom of the windshield. Keep these vents clear of leaves and other debris. Climate Control System Comfort and Convenience Features 121 Climate Control System 3.5 RL without Navigation System Fully-automatic Operation To put the Automatic Climate FULL Control in fully-automatic mode, 122 Comfort and Convenience Features TEMPERATURE AUTO FAN CONTROL CONTROL DIAL DISPLAY DIAL press the AUTO button and set the fan control dial to AUTO, then set the desired temperature by turning the temperature control dial. You will see FULL AUTO in the system’s display. The light above either the or button also goes on to show you which is selected. The system automatically selects the proper mix of conditioned and/or heated air that will, as quickly as AUTO BUTTON possible, raise or lower the interior temperature from its current level to the set temperature. In cold weather, the fan will not come on automatically until the vehicle has been driven for a short time and the heater starts to develop warm air. OFF BUTTON between the lower and upper limits, Pressing the OFF button shuts the the system regulates the interior climate control system off. Keep the temperature to the set value. system off only for short periods. To When you set the temperature to its keep stale air and mustiness from lower limit (60°F/18°C) or its upper collecting, you should have the fan limit (90°F/32°C), the system runs running at all times. at full cooling or heating only. It does not regulate the interior temperature. When the temperature is set Climate Control System Semi-automatic Operation You can manually select various functions of the Climate Control system when it is in FULL AUTO. TEMPERATURE AIR CONDITIONING CONTROL DIAL BUTTON All other features remain auto- matically controlled. Making any manual selection causes the word FULL to go out. Air Conditioning (A/C) Button Press the A/C button to operate the air conditioning. Each time you press the A/C button, the display shows the mode: A/C ECON, A/C OFF, or A/C ON. RECIRCULATED AIR FRESH AIR When you turn the A/C off, the sys- tem cannot regulate the inside tem- With the A/C in economy mode, you In this mode, you may feel a slight re- perature if you set the dial below the will see A/C ECON in the system’s duction in cooling efficiency. If you outside temperature. With the A/C display. Use this mode to get better want more cooling, select A/C ON or on, use the temperature control dial fuel economy. FULL AUTO. to adjust the temperature of the air flow to a comfortable setting. CONTINUED Comfort and Convenience Features 123 Climate Control System Recirculated and Fresh Air These two buttons control the source of the air going into the sys- tem. In Fresh Air mode ( ), air is brought in from outside the ve- hicle. In Recirculation mode ( ), air from the vehicle’s inte- rior is sent through the system again. You can, for example, manually put the system in recirculation mode when driving through an area of smoke or fumes. When you press the or button, the light in that button comes on. Fan Control Dial You can manually select the fan speed by turning the fan control dial. When you turn the dial clockwise, the fan is taken out of automatic mode and starts to run at its lowest speed. Turning the dial fully clockwise increases the fan’s speed, which increases air flow. 124 Comfort and Convenience Features Use the MODE button to select the vents the air flows from. Some air will flow from the side vents and the dashboard corner vents in all modes. Each time you press the MODE button, the display shows the mode selected. Press the button four times to see all the modes. Mode Button MODE BUTTON FAN CONTROL DIAL RECIRCULATED AIR FRESH AIR The main air flow is divided between the floor vents and de- froster vents at the base of the wind- shield. The main air flow comes from the floor vents. The main air flow is divided between the dashboard vents and the floor vents. The main air flow comes from the dashboard vents. Climate Control System CONTINUED Comfort and Convenience Features 125 Climate Control System The button directs the main air flow to the windshield for faster defrosting. It also overrides any MODE selection you may have made. When you select , the A/C turns on automatically and the system selects Fresh Air mode. For faster defrosting, manually set the fan speed to high. You can also increase air flow to the windshield by closing the side vents in the dashboard. When you turn off by pressing the button again, the system returns to its former settings. 126 Comfort and Convenience Features DEFROST BUTTON Climate Control System U.S. 3.5 RL with Navigation System Fully-automatic Operation AUTO BUTTON TEMPERATURE DISPLAY To put the Automatic Climate Control in fully-automatic mode, OFF BUTTON RECIRCULATION BUTTON press the AUTO button. Then set the desired temperature by pressing either side of the TEMP button: to raise the temperature above the displayed value, or to lower the temperature. The system automatically selects the proper mix of conditioned and/or heated air that will, as quickly as possible, raise or lower the interior temperature from its current level to TEMPERATURE BUTTON the set temperature. the system regulates the interior The fan is controlled until the heater When you set the temperature to its temperature to the set value. gets warm. lower limit (57°F/14°C ‘‘ ’’) or its upper limit (87°F/31°C In cold weather, the fan will not ‘‘ ’’), the system runs at full come on automatically until the cooling or heating only. It does not vehicle has been driven for a short regulate the interior temperature. time and the heater starts to develop When the temperature is set warm air. between the lower and upper limits, Comfort and Convenience Features 127 Pressing the OFF button shuts the climate control system off. Keep the system off only for short periods. To keep stale air and mustiness from collecting, you should have the fan running at all times. Climate Control System Semi-automatic Operation You can manually select various functions of the Climate Control system when it is in FULL AUTO. All other features remain auto- matically controlled. Some of these functions appear in the Navigation System display. With the Navigation System, press the A/C-INFO button next to the display to show these functions. Air Conditioning (A/C) On/Off/Econ Icons Use the A/C icons in the display to select the air conditioning mode. You will see A/C ON, A/C OFF, or A/C ECON activated in the display. 128 Comfort and Convenience Features A/C-INFO BUTTON RECIRCULATION BUTTON TEMPERATURE BUTTON MODE ICONS FAN SPEED ICONS A/C ON/OFF/ECON ICONS When you turn the A/C off, the system cannot regulate the inside temperature if you set it below the outside temperature. With the A/C on, use the temperature buttons to adjust the temperature of the air flow to a comfortable setting. With the A/C in economy mode, you will see A/C ECON in the display. Use this mode to get better fuel economy. In this mode, you may feel a slight re- duction in cooling efficiency. If you want more cooling, select A/C ON or FULL AUTO. Climate Control System Recirculation Button Fan Speed Icon This button controls the source of You can manually select the fan the air going into the system. When speed with the fan speed icon. the indicator above this button is lit, Touching the icon repeatedly makes air from the vehicle’s interior is sent the fan run faster. The fan speed is through the system again (Recircula- shown by bars in the display. If the tion mode). When the indicator is off, fan is at its highest speed, touching air is brought in from outside the the icon again takes it to its lowest vehicle (Fresh Air mode). speed. You can, for example, manually put the system in recirculation mode when driving through an area of smoke or fumes. To remove fog from the inside of the windows (on very cold days), you select , the A/C turns on automatically and the system selects Fresh Air mode. CONTINUED Comfort and Convenience Features 129 Climate Control System Mode Icons Use the MODE icons to select the vents the air flows from. Some air will flow from the dashboard corner vents and the side vents in all modes. The main air flow is divided between the floor vents and de- froster vents at the base of the wind- shield. The main air flow comes from the floor vents. The main air flow is divided between the dashboard vents and the floor vents. The main air flow comes from the dashboard vents. 130 Comfort and Convenience Features The button directs the main air flow to the windshield for faster defrosting. It also overrides any MODE selection you may have made. When you select , the A/C turns on automatically and the system selects Fresh Air mode. For faster defrosting, manually set the fan speed to high. You can also increase air flow to the windshield by closing the side vents in the dashboard. When you turn off by pressing the button again, the system returns to its former settings. Rear Window Defogger Button This button turns the rear window defogger on and off (see page ).76 Climate Control System DEFROST BUTTON REAR WINDOW DEFOGGER BUTTON Comfort and Convenience Features 131 Climate Control System Rear Ventilation You can adjust the direction of the Mode Control Lever AIR FLOW CONTROL LEVER UPPER VENTS air coming from the upper vents in Use the center console by moving the tab in the center of each vent up-and- down and side-to-side. You can also adjust the amount of the air flow by sliding the air flow control lever under the upper vents. Slide this lever upward to increase the amount of air flow. Comfort and Convenience Features the mode control lever to select the air flow level. Air flows into the rear seat at three levels. MODE CONTROL LEVER LOWER VENTS (Upper position): Air flows from the upper vents in the back of the center console. ɻ (Center position): Air flow is divided between the upper vents and the lower vents in the back of the center console. The air flow from the rear vents can (Lower position): be adjusted when the climate control Air flows from the lower vents. system is on. ˓ ɻ ˔ (Upper position): Maximum (Center position): Moderate (Lower position): Off 132 Sunlight Sensor/Temperature Sensor SUNLIGHT SENSOR TEMPERATURE SENSOR The climate control system has two sensors. A sunlight sensor is located in the top of the dashboard and a temperature sensor is next to the steering column. Do not cover the sensors or spill any liquid on them. Climate Control System Comfort and Convenience Features 133 Audio System AM/FM/Cassette/CD Changer Audio System Comfort and Convenience Features 3.5 RL without Navigation System Your Acura’s audio system provides clear reception on both AM and FM bands, while the preset buttons allow you to easily select your favorite stations. The cassette system features Dolby noise reduction, automatic sensing of chromium-dioxide (CrO ) tape, and auto-reverse for continuous play. The in-dash CD changer holds up to six discs. You operate the CD changer with the same controls used for the radio. See page for CD changer operation. ˎ ˎ 2 Dolby noise reduction manufactured under license from Dolby Laboratories Licensing Corpo- ration. ‘‘DOLBY’’ and the double-D symbol are trademarks of Dolby Laboratories Licensing Corporation. The anti-theft feature will disable the system if it is disconnected from the 143 vehicle’s battery. To get the system working again, you must enter a code number (see page 180 ). 134 Audio System Operating the Radio You can use any of five methods to SCAN ɻ The SCAN function The ignition switch must be in find radio stations on the selected samples all the stations with strong ACCESSORY (I) or ON (II) to band: TUNE, SEEK, SCAN, AUTO signals on the selected band. To operate the audio system. Turn the SELECT, and the preset buttons. activate it, press the SCAN button, system on by pressing the PWR/ then release it. You will see SCAN in VOL knob, or the AM or FM button. TUNE ɻ Use the TUNE knob to the display. The system will scan up Adjust the volume by turning the tune the radio to a desired frequency. the band for a station with a strong knob. Turn the TUNE knob to the right to signal. When it finds one, it will stop tune to a higher frequency, or to the and play that station for The band and frequency that the left to tune to a lower frequency. approximately five seconds. If you do radio was last tuned to is displayed. Turn the knob right or left until the nothing, the system will then scan To change bands, press the AM or display reaches the desired for the next strong station and play FM button. On the FM band, ST will frequency. that for five seconds. When it plays a be displayed if the station is broad- station that you want to continue casting in stereo. Stereo SEEK ɻ The SEEK function listening to, press the SCAN button reproduction on AM is not available. searches the band for a station with again. a strong signal. To activate it, press either SEEK button ( ɻ or ɹ ), then release it. Depending on which SEEK button you press, the system scans upward or downward from the current frequency. It stops when it finds a station with a strong signal. CONTINUED Comfort and Convenience Features 135 Audio System Preset ɻ You can store the frequencies of your favorite radio stations in the six preset buttons. Each button will store one frequency on the AM band, and two frequencies on the FM band. Use the TUNE, SEEK, or SCAN function to tune the radio to a desired station. Once a station’s frequency is stored, The preset frequencies will be lost if simply press and release the proper your car’s battery goes dead, is preset button to tune to it. disconnected, or the radio fuse is removed. Comfort and Convenience Features PWR/VOL KNOB AM BUTTON FM BUTTON ST INDICATOR TUNE KNOB To store a frequency: 1. Select the desired band, AM or FM. FM1 and FM2 let you store two frequencies with each preset button. 2. 3. SCAN BUTTON PRESET BUTTONS SEEK BUTTONS 4. Pick the preset button you want for that station. Press the button and hold it until you hear a beep. Repeat steps 1 to 3 to store a total of six stations on AM and twelve on FM. 136 ɻ AUTO SELECT If you are traveling far from home and can no longer receive the stations you preset, you can use the Auto Select feature to find stations in the local area. To activate Auto Select, press the A. SEL button. A. SEL will flash in the display, and the system will go into scan mode for several seconds. It automatically scans both bands, looking for stations with strong signals. It stores the frequencies of six AM stations and twelve FM stations in the preset buttons. You can then use the preset buttons to select those stations. If you are in a remote area, Auto Select may not find six strong AM stations or twelve strong FM stations. If this happens, you will see a ‘‘0’’ displayed when you press any preset button that does not have a station stored. Audio System A.SEL INDICATOR TUNE KNOB SCAN BUTTON A.SEL PRESET SEEK BUTTONS BUTTON BUTTONS If you do not like the stations Auto Auto Select does not erase the Select has stored, you can store frequencies that you preset pre- other frequencies in the preset viously. When you return home, turn buttons. Use the TUNE, SEEK, or off Auto Select by pressing the SCAN function to find the desired A. SEL button. The preset buttons frequencies, then store them in the will then select the frequencies you selected preset buttons as described originally set. previously. Comfort and Convenience Features 137 Audio System Adjusting the Sound Audio System Lighting Bass, Treble, Balance, and Fader are You can use the instrument panel each adjustable. You select which of brightness control dial to adjust the il- these you want to adjust by pressing lumination of the audio system (see the TUNE knob. The mode changes page ). The audio system from BAS to TRE to FAD to BAL, illuminates when the parking lights and then back to the selected audio are on, even if the radio is turned off. mode, each time you press the TUNE knob. Radio Frequencies and Reception For information, see page . Treble/Bass Use these modes to adjust the tone to your liking. Select TRE or BAS by pressing the TUNE knob. Adjust the desired mode by turning the TUNE knob. The displayed number shows you the current setting. When the adjustment level reaches the center, you will see ‘‘ ’’. Balance/Fader These two modes adjust the strength of the sound coming from each speaker. BAL adjusts the side-to-side strength, while FAD adjusts the front-to-back strength. Comfort and Convenience Features Select BAL or FAD by pressing the TUNE knob. Adjust the Balance or Fader to your liking by turning the TUNE knob. The displayed number shows you the current setting. When the adjustment level reaches the center, you will see ‘‘ ’’. The system will automatically return the display to the selected audio mode about five seconds after you stop adjusting a mode with the TUNE knob. 71 156 ɻ ɻ 138 The ignition switch must be in ACCESSORY (I) or ON (II). Make sure the tape opening on the cassette is facing to the right, then insert the cassette most of the way into the slot. The system will pull it in the rest of the way, and begin to play. The tape direction indicator will light to show you which side of the cassette is playing. The indicates the side you inserted facing upward is now playing. If you want to play the other side, press the PROG button. Operating the Cassette Player ̨ Dolby noise reduction turns on when you insert a cassette. The indi- cator will light in the display. If the tape was not recorded with Dolby noise reduction, turn it off by pressing the button. Noise reduction remains off until you turn it on by pressing the button again. When the system reaches the end of the tape, it will automatically reverse direction and play the other side. If you want to remove the cassette from the drive, press the TAPE EJECT button. You can remove the cassette with the ignition switch in any position, even if the audio system is turned off. Audio System If you turn the system off while a tape is playing, either with the PWR/ VOL knob or by turning off the ignition, the cassette will remain in the drive. When you turn the system back on, the tape will begin playing where it left off. To switch to the radio or CD changer while listening to a tape, press the AM, FM or CD button. To change back to the cassette player, press the TAPE button. Comfort and Convenience Features 139 Audio System Tape Search Functions With a cassette playing, you can use the FF, REW, SKIP, or REPEAT function to find a desired program. FF/REW ɻ Fast Forward and Rewind move the tape rapidly. To rewind the tape, push the REW button. You will see REW in the display. To fast forward the tape, push the FF button. You will see FF displayed. Press the FF, REW or PLAY button to take the system out of rewind or fast forward. When the system reaches the end of the tape, it reverses direction and begins to play. 140 Comfort and Convenience Features CASSETTE PWR/VOL KNOB TAPE DIRECTION INDICATOR SLOT DOLBY INDICATOR TAPE EJECT BUTTON TAPE BUTTON AM BUTTON PLAY BUTTON PROG BUTTON FM BUTTON DOLBY BUTTON CD BUTTON FF BUTTON REW BUTTON Audio System SKIP ɻ The SKIP function allows you to find the beginning of a song RPT INDICATOR or passage. To skip to the beginning of a song or passage currently playing, push the ɻ button. You will see REW flashing in the display as the tape rewinds. To skip to the beginning of the next song, push the ɹ button. You will see FF flashing in the display as the tape fast forwards. When the system finds the begin- ning of a song or passage, it goes back to PLAY. To stop the SKIP function before it finds the beginning of a song or passage, press either of the SKIP buttons ( ɻ or ɹ ). RPT BUTTON REW BUTTON FF BUTTON SKIP BUTTONS CONTINUED Comfort and Convenience Features 141 Audio System 142 REPEAT ɻ The Repeat function The SKIP and REPEAT functions Caring for the Cassette Player continuously replays the current use silent periods on the tape to find song or passage. Press the RPT the end of a song or passage. These button to activate it; you will see RPT features may not work to your displayed as a reminder. When the satisfaction if there is almost no gap system reaches the end of the song between selections, a high noise or passage currently playing, it will level between selections, or a silent automatically go into rewind. When period in the middle of a selection. it senses the beginning of the same song or passage, the system returns to PLAY mode. It will continue to repeat this same program until you deactivate REPEAT by pressing the button again. Pressing the REW or FF button, or either of the SKIP buttons, also turns off REPEAT. Comfort and Convenience Features Damaged cassettes can jam inside the drive or cause other problems. See page 163 for information on cassette care and protection. Audio System Operating the CD Changer Your Acura’s audio system has an in- LOAD BUTTON DISC INDICATOR dash CD changer that holds up to six discs, providing several hours of CD EJECT BUTTON CD SLOT continuous entertainment. You operate this CD changer with the same controls used for the radio and cassette player. To load CDs or operate the CD changer, the ignition switch must be in ACCESSORY (I) or ON (II). Load and play only standard round discs. Odd-shaped CDs may jam in the drive or cause other problems. Avoid using CDs that have adhesive- type labels. The edges can curl up and cause the CD to jam in the drive. You cannot load and play 3-inch (8-cm) discs in this system. PWR/VOL KNOB RDM BUTTON RPT BUTTON CD BUTTON SKIP BUTTONS CONTINUED Comfort and Convenience Features 143 Audio System For best results use only high quality CD-R discs labeled for audio use. The CD player can only play closed CD-R recordings. CD-RW discs will not work in this unit. Loading CDs in the Changer To load multiple CDs in one operation: 1. Press and hold the LOAD button until you hear a beep and see ‘‘LOAD’’ in the display, then release the button. 2. On the right side of the display, the CD Loaded indicator for an empty position will begin blinking and the green disc indicator will come on. 3. Insert the disc into the CD slot about halfway, the drive will pull it in the rest of the way. The disc indicator turns red and blinks as the CD is loaded. 144 Comfort and Convenience Features When 4. LOAD appears again in the display, insert the next disc into the CD slot. Do no try to insert a disc until LOAD appears. You could damage the audio unit. 5. Repeat this until all six positions are loaded. The system will then begin playing the last CD loaded. If you are not loading CDs into all six positions, press the LOAD button again after the last CD has loaded. The system will begin playing the last CD loaded. If you stop loading CDs before all six positions are filled, and you do not press the LOAD button, the system will wait for ten seconds, then stop the load operation and begin playing the last CD loaded. To load a single CD: 1. Press and release the LOAD button. 2. The CD Loaded indicator for an empty position will start to blink the green disc indicator will come on, and LOAD will appear in the display. Insert the disc into the CD slot about halfway, the drive will pull it in the rest of the way. 3. The system will load the CD, and begin playing it. If you press the LOAD button while a CD is playing, the system will stop playing that CD and start the loading sequence. It will then play the CD just loaded. You can also load a CD into an empty position while a CD is playing by pressing the appropriate preset button. Select an empty position (the CD Loaded indicator is off), and press the preset button for that position (1 to 6). The system will stop playing the current CD and start the loading sequence. It will then play the CD just loaded. Audio System LOAD BUTTON FM CD SLOT BUTTON CD LOADED INDICATOR AM BUTTON PRESET BUTTONS TAPE BUTTON CONTINUED Comfort and Convenience Features 145 Audio System Operation REPEAT ɻ To activate the Repeat feature, press and release the RPT button. You will see RPT in the display as a reminder. The system continuously replays the current track. Press the RPT button again to turn it off. Pressing either of the SKIP buttons also turns off the repeat feature. RANDOM PLAY ɻ This feature, when activated, plays the tracks within a CD in random order, rather than in the order they are recorded on the CD. To activate Random Play, press the RDM button. You will see RDM in the display. The system will then select and play tracks randomly. This continues until you deactivate Random Play by pressing the RDM button again, or you select a different CD with a preset button. 146 Comfort and Convenience Features To move rapidly within a track, press Select the CD changer by pressing and hold the appropriate SKIP the CD button. You will see ‘‘CD’’ in button. You will hear a beep and the the display. The system will begin system will continue to move. Press playing the last selected disc in the the button to move forward, or CD changer. You will see the disc the button to move backward. and track numbers displayed. Release the button when the system reaches the point you want. Each time you press the button and release it, the system skips forward to the beginning of the next track. Press and release the button to skip backward to the beginning of the current track. Press and release it again to skip to the beginning of the previous track. 144 ˓ ɹ ɻ When that disc ends, the next disc in the CD changer is loaded and played. ˓ ɹ After the last disc finishes, the system returns to disc 1. ˓ ɻ To select a different disc, press the appropriate Preset button (1 6). If you select an empty position in the CD changer, the system will go into the loading sequence (see page ). You can use the SKIP buttons while a disc is playing to select passages and change tracks. ɻ To take the system out of CD mode, press the AM or FM button, or insert a cassette in the player. If a tape is already in the cassette player, press the TAPE button. When you return to CD mode by pressing the CD button, play will continue at the same point that it left off. If you turn the system off while a CD is playing, either with the PWR/VOL knob or the ignition switch, play will continue at the same point when you turn it back on. Audio System PWR/VOL KNOB FM BUTTON RPT INDICATOR RDM INDICATOR CD BUTTON AM BUTTON TAPE BUTTON RPT BUTTON RDM BUTTON PRESET BUTTONS SKIP BUTTONS CONTINUED Comfort and Convenience Features 147 Audio System Removing CDs from the Changer To remove the disc that is currently playing, press the CD eject button. You will see ‘‘EJCT’’ in the display. When you remove the disc from the slot, the system automatically begins the Load sequence so you can load another CD in that position. If you do not load another CD, after ten seconds the system begins playing the next disc in the changer. If the changer is empty, the system selects the previous mode (AM, FM, or Tape). If you do not remove the disc from the slot, the system will reload the disc after ten seconds and begin playing it. To remove a different CD from the changer, first select it with the appropriate preset button. When that CD begins playing, press the CD eject button. 148 Comfort and Convenience Features CD EJECT BUTTON CD SLOT CD BUTTON If you press the CD eject button while listening to the radio or tape, or with the audio system turned off, the disc that was last selected is ejected. After that disc is ejected, pressing the CD eject button again will eject the next disc in the numerical order. By doing this six times, you can remove all the CDs from the changer. In any mode, if you press the CD eject button and hold it until you hear a beep, the system will eject all of the discs in the changer. You can also eject discs when the ignition switch is off. The disc that was last selected is ejected first. You can eject up to six discs, one at a time. Audio System Protecting Compact Discs For information on how to handle and protect compact discs, see page 171 . Comfort and Convenience Features 149 Audio System CD Changer Error Indications If you see an error indication in the Indication display while operating the CD changer, find the cause in the chart to the right. If you cannot clear the error indication, take the vehicle to your Acura dealer. 150 Comfort and Convenience Features Solution Cause Press the CD eject button and pull out the CDs, Mechanical Error. check for error indication. Insert the CD again. If the code does not disappear or the CD cannot be pulled out, consult your Acura dealer. High temperature. Will disappear when the temperature returns to normal. Your Acura’s audio system provides clear reception on both AM and FM bands, while the preset buttons allow you to easily select your favorite stations. The cassette system features Dolby noise reduction, automatic sensing of chromium-dioxide (CrO ) tape, and auto-reverse for continuous play. The in-dash CD changer holds up to six discs. You operate the CD changer with the same controls used for the radio. See page for CD changer operation. ˎ ˎ 2 Dolby noise reduction manufactured under license from Dolby Laboratories Licensing Corpo- ration. ‘‘DOLBY’’ and the double-D symbol are trademarks of Dolby Laboratories Licensing Corporation. 164 180 AM/FM/Cassette/CD Changer/ Satellite Digital Radio Audio System Audio System U.S. 3.5 RL with Navigation System The anti-theft feature will disable the system if it is disconnected from the vehicle’s battery. To get the system working again, you must enter a code number (see page ). Comfort and Convenience Features 151 Audio System Operating the Radio You can use any of five methods to SCAN ɻ The SCAN function The ignition switch must be in find radio stations on the selected samples all the stations with strong ACCESSORY (I) or ON (II) to band: TUNE, SEEK, SCAN, AUTO signals on the selected band. To operate the audio system. Turn the SELECT, and the preset buttons. activate it, press the SCAN button, system on by pressing the PWR/ then release it. You will see SCAN in VOL knob or the AM/FM button. TUNE ɻ Use the TUNE knob to the display. The system will scan up Adjust the volume by turning the tune the radio to a desired frequency. the band for a station with a strong knob. Turn the TUNE knob to the right to signal. When it finds one, it will stop tune to a higher frequency, or to the and play that station for The band and frequency that the left to tune to a lower frequency. approximately five seconds. If you do radio was last tuned to is displayed. Turn the knob right or left until the nothing, the system will then scan To change bands, press the AM/FM display reaches the desired for the next strong station and play button. On the FM band, ST will be frequency. that for five seconds. When it plays a displayed if the station is broadcast- station that you want to continue ing in stereo. Stereo reproduction on SEEK ɻ The SEEK function listening to, press the SCAN button AM is not available. searches the band for a station with again. a strong signal. To activate it, press either SEEK button ( ɻ or ɹ ), then release it. Depending on which SEEK button you press, the system scans upward or downward from the current frequency. It stops when it finds a station with a strong signal. 152 Comfort and Convenience Features Audio System Preset ɻ You can store the frequencies of your favorite radio stations in the six preset buttons. PWR/VOL AM/FM BUTTON ST INDICATOR TUNE KNOB KNOB Each button will store one frequency on the AM band, and two frequencies on the FM band. To store a frequency: 1. Select the desired band, AM or FM. FM1 and FM2 let you store two frequencies with each preset button. 2. Use the TUNE, SEEK, or SCAN function to tune the radio to a desired station. 3. Pick the preset button you want for that station. Press the button SCAN BUTTON PRESET BUTTONS SEEK BUTTONS and hold it until you hear a beep. Once a station’s frequency is stored, The preset frequencies will be lost if 4. Repeat steps 1 to 3 to store a total simply press and release the proper your car’s battery goes dead, is of six stations on AM and twelve preset button to tune to it. disconnected, or the radio fuse is on FM. removed. CONTINUED Comfort and Convenience Features 153 Audio System 154 AUTO SELECT ɻ If you are traveling far from home and can no longer receive the stations you preset, you can use the Auto Select feature to find stations in the local area. To activate Auto Select, press the A. SEL button. A. SEL will flash in the display, and the system will go into scan mode for several seconds. It automatically scans both bands, looking for stations with strong signals. It stores the frequencies of six AM stations and twelve FM stations in the preset buttons. You can then use the preset buttons to select those stations. If you are in a remote area, Auto Select may not find six strong AM stations or twelve strong FM stations. If this happens, you will see a ‘‘0’’ displayed when you press any preset button that does not have a station stored. Comfort and Convenience Features If you do not like the stations Auto Select has stored, you can store other frequencies in the preset buttons. Use the TUNE, SEEK, or SCAN function to find the desired frequencies, then store them in the selected preset buttons as described previously. TUNE A.SEL INDICATOR KNOB A.SEL BUTTON SCAN PRESET SEEK BUTTONS BUTTON BUTTONS Auto Select does not erase the frequencies that you preset pre- viously. When you return home, turn off Auto Select by pressing the A. SEL button. The preset buttons will then select the frequencies you originally set. Audio System Adjusting the Sound Select BAL or FAD by pressing the Audio System Lighting Bass, Treble, Balance, and Fader are TUNE knob. Adjust the Balance or You can use the instrument panel each adjustable. You select which of Fader to your liking by turning the brightness control dial to adjust the il- these you want to adjust by pressing TUNE knob. The displayed number lumination of the audio system (see the TUNE knob. The mode changes shows you the current setting. When page 71 ). The audio system from BAS to TRE to FAD to BAL, the adjustment level reaches the illuminates when the parking lights and then back to the selected audio center, you will see ‘‘ ’’. are on, even if the radio is turned off. mode, each time you press the TUNE knob. The system will automatically return the display to the selected audio Treble/Bass ɻ Use these modes to mode about five seconds after you adjust the tone to your liking. Select stop adjusting a mode with the TRE or BAS by pressing the TUNE TUNE knob. knob. Adjust the desired mode by turning the TUNE knob. The displayed number shows you the current setting. When the adjustment level reaches the center, you will see ‘‘ ’’. Balance/Fader ɻ These two modes adjust the strength of the sound coming from each speaker. BAL adjusts the side-to-side strength, while FAD adjusts the front-to-back strength. Comfort and Convenience Features 155 Audio System Radio Frequencies Radio Reception Your Acura’s radio can receive the How well your Acura’s radio receives complete AM and FM bands. stations is dependent on many Those bands cover these frequen- factors, such as the distance from cies: the station’s transmitter, nearby large objects, and atmospheric AM band: conditions. 530 to 1,710 kilohertz FM band: A radio station’s signal gets weaker 87.7 to 107.9 megahertz as you get farther away from its transmitter. If you are listening to an Radio stations on the AM band are AM station, you will notice the sound assigned frequencies at least ten volume becoming weaker, and the kilohertz apart (530, 540, 550). station drifting in and out. If you are Stations on the FM band are listening to an FM station, you will assigned frequencies at least 0.2 see the stereo indicator flickering off megahertz apart (87.9, 88.1, 88.3). and on as the signal weakens. Eventually, the stereo indicator will Stations must use these exact go off and the sound will fade frequencies. It is fairly common for completely as you get out of range of stations to round-off the frequency in the station’s signal. their advertising, so your radio could display a frequency of 100.9 even though the announcer may identify the station as ‘‘FM101.’’ 156 Comfort and Convenience Features Driving very near the transmitter of a station that is broadcasting on a frequency close to the frequency of the station you are listening to can also affect your radio’s reception. You may temporarily hear both stations, or hear only the station you are close to. Radio signals, especially on the FM band, are deflected by large objects such as buildings and hills. Your radio then receives both the direct signal from the station’s transmitter, and the deflected signal. This causes the sound to distort or flutter. This is a main cause of poor radio reception in city driving. Radio reception can be affected by atmospheric conditions such as thunderstorms, high humidity, and even sunspots. You may be able to receive a distant radio station one day and not receive it the next day because of a change in conditions. Electrical interference from passing vehicles and stationary sources can cause temporary reception problems. Audio System As required by the FCC: Changes or modifications not expressly approved by the party responsible for compliance could void the user’s authority to operate the equipment. Comfort and Convenience Features 157 Audio System Digital Clock The audio system display usually shows the time when the ignition switch is in ACCESSORY (I) or ON (II). To set the clock, press and hold the CLOCK (CD/TAPE) button until the number flash. Change the hours by pressing the H button until the numbers advance to the desired time. Change the minutes by pressing the M button until the numbers advance to the desired time. 158 Comfort and Convenience Features You can use R to quickly set the time to the nearest hour. If the displayed time is before the half hour, pressing R sets the clock back to the previous hour. If the displayed time is after the half hour, pressing R sets the clock forward to the beginning of the next hour. CLOCK BUTTON H BUTTON R BUTTON M BUTTON For example: 1:06 would RESET to 1:00 1:52 would RESET to 2:00 The ignition switch must be in ACCESSORY (I) or ON (II). Make sure the tape opening on the cassette is facing to the right, then insert the cassette most of the way into the slot. The system will pull it in the rest of the way, and begin to play. The tape direction indicator will light to show you which side of the cassette is playing. The indicates the side you inserted facing upward is now playing. If you want to play the other side, press the PROG button. Operating the Cassette Player ̨ Dolby noise reduction turns on when you insert a cassette. The indi- cator will light in the display. If the tape was not recorded with Dolby noise reduction, turn it off by pressing the button. Noise reduction remains off until you turn it on by pressing the button again. When the system reaches the end of the tape, it will automatically reverse direction and play the other side. If you want to remove the cassette from the drive, press the TAPE EJECT button. You can remove the cassette with the ignition switch in any position, even if the audio system is turned off. Audio System If you turn the system off while a tape is playing, either with the PWR/ VOL knob or by turning off the ignition, the cassette will remain in the drive. When you turn the system back on, the tape will begin playing where it left off. To switch to the radio or CD changer while listening to a tape, press the AM/FM or CD/TAPE but- ton. To change back to the cassette player, press the CD/TAPE button. Comfort and Convenience Features 159 Audio System Tape Search Functions With a cassette playing, you can use the FF, REW, SKIP, or REPEAT function to find a desired program. FF/REW ɻ Fast Forward and Rewind move the tape rapidly. To rewind the tape, push the REW button. You will see REW in the display. To fast forward the tape, push the FF button. You will see FF displayed. Press the FF, REW or PLAY button to take the system out of rewind or fast forward. When the system reaches the end of the tape, it reverses direction and begins to play. 160 Comfort and Convenience Features TAPE PWR/VOL KNOB DIRECTION INDICATOR DOLBY INDICATOR PLAY BUTTON PROG BUTTON AM/FM BUTTON CASSETTE SLOT TAPE EJECT BUTTON CD/TAPE BUTTON DOLBY BUTTON FF BUTTON REW BUTTON Audio System SKIP ɻ The SKIP function allows you to find the beginning of a song or passage. To skip to the beginning RPT INDICATOR of a song or passage currently playing, push the ɻ button. You will see REW flashing in the display as the tape rewinds. To skip to the beginning of the next song, push the ɹ button. You will see FF flashing in the display as the tape fast forwards. When the system finds the begin- ning of a song or passage, it goes back to PLAY. To stop the SKIP function before it finds the beginning of a song or passage, press either of the SKIP buttons ( ɻ or ɹ ). RPT BUTTON FF BUTTON SKIP BUTTONS REW BUTTON CONTINUED Comfort and Convenience Features 161 Audio System 162 REPEAT ɻ The Repeat function continuously replays the current song or passage. Press the RPT button to activate it; you will see RPT displayed as a reminder. When the system reaches the end of the song or passage currently playing, it will automatically go into rewind. When it senses the beginning of the same song or passage, the system returns to PLAY mode. It will continue to repeat this same program until you deactivate REPEAT by pressing the button again. Pressing the REW or FF button, or either of the SKIP buttons, also turns off REPEAT. Comfort and Convenience Features The SKIP and REPEAT functions use silent periods on the tape to find the end of a song or passage. These features may not work to your satisfaction if there is almost no gap between selections, a high noise level between selections, or a silent period in the middle of a selection. The cassette player picks up dirt and oxides from the tape. This contami- nation builds up over time and causes the sound quality to degrade. To prevent this, you should clean the player after every 30 hours of use. Your dealer has a cleaning kit available. If you do not clean the cassette player regularly, it may eventually become impossible to remove the contamination with a normal cleaning kit. Caring for the Cassette Player Use 100-minute or shorter cassettes. Cassettes longer than that use thinner tape that may break or jam the drive. Look at the cassette before you insert it. If the tape is loose, tighten it by turning a hub with a pencil or your finger. If the label is peeling off, remove it from the cassette or it could cause the cassette to jam in the player. Never try to insert a warped or damaged cassette in the player. Audio System When they are not in use, store cassettes in their cases to protect them from dust and moisture. Never place cassettes where they will be exposed to direct sunlight, high heat, or high humidity. If a cassette is exposed to extreme heat or cold, let it reach a moderate temperature before inserting it in the player. Never try to insert foreign objects into the cassette player. If you see the error indication ‘‘ ’’ on the display, press the TAPE EJECT button to remove the cassette from the unit. Make sure the tape is not damaged. If the cassette will not eject or the error indication stays on after the cassette ejects, take the vehicle to your Acura dealer. Comfort and Convenience Features 163 Audio System Operating the CD Changer Your Acura’s audio system has an in- dash CD changer that holds up to six discs, providing several hours of continuous entertainment. You operate this CD changer with the same controls used for the radio and cassette player. To load CDs or operate the CD changer, the ignition switch must be in ACCESSORY (I) or ON (II). Load and play only standard round discs. Odd-shaped CDs may jam in the drive or cause other problems. Avoid using CDs that have adhesive- type labels. The edges can curl up and cause the CD to jam in the drive. You cannot load and play 3-inch (8-cm) discs in this system. 164 Comfort and Convenience Features LOAD CD EJECT DISC BUTTON BUTTON INDICATOR CD SLOT PWR/VOL CD/TAPE BUTTON KNOB RPT BUTTON SKIP BUTTONS RDM BUTTON Audio System For best results use only high quality 4. When LOAD appears again in the To load a single CD: CD-R discs labeled for audio use. display, insert the next disc into The CD player can only play closed the CD slot. Do no try to insert a 1. Press and release the LOAD CD-R recordings. CD-RW discs will disc until LOAD appears. You button. not work in this unit. could damage the audio unit. 2. The CD Loaded indicator for an Loading CDs in the Changer 5. Repeat this until all six positions empty position will start to blink To load multiple CDs in one are loaded. The system will then the green disc indicator will come operation: begin playing the last CD loaded. on, and LOAD will appear in the display. Insert the disc into the CD 1. Press and hold the LOAD button If you are not loading CDs into all six slot about halfway, the drive will until you hear a beep and see positions, press the LOAD button pull it in the rest of the way. ‘‘LOAD’’ in the display, then again after the last CD has loaded. release the button. The system will begin playing the 3. The system will load the CD, and last CD loaded. begin playing it. 2. On the right side of the display, the CD Loaded indicator for an If you stop loading CDs before all six empty position will begin blinking positions are filled, and you do not and the green disc indicator will press the LOAD button, the system come on. will wait for ten seconds, then stop the load operation and begin playing 3. Insert the disc into the CD slot the last CD loaded. about halfway, the drive will pull it in the rest of the way. The disc indicator turns red and blinks as the CD is loaded. CONTINUED Comfort and Convenience Features 165 Audio System If you press the LOAD button while a CD is playing, the system will stop playing that CD and start the loading sequence. It will then play the CD just loaded. You can also load a CD into an empty position while a CD is playing by pressing the appropriate preset button. Select an empty position (the CD Loaded indicator is off), and press the preset button for that position (1 to 6). The system will stop playing the current CD and start the loading sequence. It will then play the CD just loaded. 166 Comfort and Convenience Features LOAD BUTTON AM/FM CD SLOT BUTTON CD INDICATOR LOADED CD/TAPE BUTTON PRESET BUTTONS Audio System Operation To move rapidly within a track, press REPEAT ɻ To activate the Repeat Select the CD changer by pressing and hold the appropriate SKIP feature, press and release the RPT the CD/TAPE button. You will see button. You will hear a beep and the button. You will see RPT in the ‘‘CD’’ in the display. The system will system will continue to move. Press display as a reminder. The system begin playing the last selected disc in the ɹ button to move forward, or continuously replays the current the CD changer. You will see the the ɻ button to move backward. track. Press the RPT button again to disc and track numbers displayed. Release the button when the system turn it off. Pressing either of the reaches the point you want. SKIP buttons also turns off the When that disc ends, the next disc in repeat feature. the CD changer is loaded and played. Each time you press the ɹ button After the last disc finishes, the and release it, the system skips RANDOM PLAY ɻ This feature, system returns to disc 1. forward to the beginning of the next when activated, plays the tracks track. Press and release the ˓ ɻ within a CD in random order, rather To select a different disc, press the button to skip backward to the than in the order they are recorded appropriate Preset button (1 ɻ 6). If beginning of the current track. Press on the CD. To activate Random Play, you select an empty position in the and release it again to skip to the press the RDM button. You will see CD changer, the system will go into beginning of the previous track. RDM in the display. The system will the loading sequence (see page 165 ). then select and play tracks randomly. This continues until you deactivate You can use the SKIP buttons while Random Play by pressing the RDM a disc is playing to select passages button again, or you select a and change tracks. different CD with a preset button. CONTINUED Comfort and Convenience Features 167 Audio System To take the system out of CD mode, press the AM/FM button or insert a cassette in the player. If a tape is already in the cassette player, press the CD/TAPE button. When you return to CD mode by pressing the CD/TAPE button, play will continue at the same point that it left off. If you turn the system off while a CD is playing, either with the PWR/VOL knob or the ignition switch, play will continue at the same point when you turn it back on. 168 Comfort and Convenience Features AM/FM PWR/VOL CD/TAPE BUTTON KNOB RPT INDICATOR BUTTON RDM INDICATOR RDM BUTTON RPT BUTTON PRESET BUTTONS SKIP BUTTONS Audio System Comfort and Convenience Features Removing CDs from the Changer To remove the disc that is currently playing, press the CD eject button. CD EJECT BUTTON CD SLOT You will see ‘‘EJCT’’ in the display. When you remove the disc from the slot, the system automatically begins the Load sequence so you can load another CD in that position. If you do not load another CD, after ten seconds the system begins playing the next disc in the changer. If the changer is empty, the system selects the previous mode (AM, FM, or Tape). If you do not remove the disc from the slot, the system will reload the disc after ten seconds and begin playing it. To remove a different CD from the changer, first select it with the CD/TAPE BUTTON appropriate preset button. When that CD begins playing, press the CD eject button. CONTINUED 169 Audio System If you press the CD eject button while listening to the radio or tape, or with the audio system turned off, the disc that was last selected is ejected. After that disc is ejected, pressing the CD eject button again will eject the next disc in the numerical order. By doing this six times, you can remove all the CDs from the changer. In any mode, if you press the CD eject button and hold it until you hear a beep, the system will eject all of the discs in the changer. You can also eject discs when the ignition switch is off. The disc that was last selected is ejected first. You can eject up to six discs, one at a time. 170 Comfort and Convenience Features Handle a CD by its edges; never touch either surface. Do not place stabilizer rings or labels on the CD. These, along with contamination from fingerprints, liquids, and felt-tip pens, can cause the CD to not play properly, or possibly jam in the drive. Protecting Compact Discs When a CD is not being played, store it in its case to protect it from dust and other contamination. To prevent warpage, keep CDs out of direct sunlight and extreme heat. To clean a disc, use a clean soft cloth. Wipe across the disc from the center to the outside edge. Audio System A new CD may be rough on the inner and outer edges. The small plastic pieces causing this roughness can flake off and fall on the re- cording surface of the disc, causing skipping or other problems. Remove these pieces by rubbing the inner and outer edges with the side of a pencil or pen. Never try to insert foreign objects in the CD player or the magazine. Comfort and Convenience Features 171 Audio System CD Changer Error Indications If you see an error indication in the display while operating the CD changer, find the cause in the chart to the right. If you cannot clear the error indication, take the vehicle to your Acura dealer. 172 Comfort and Convenience Features Indication Cause Solution Press the CD eject button and pull out the CDs, Mechanical Error. check for error indication, Insert the CD again. If the code does not disappear or the CD cannot be pulled out, consult your Acura dealer. High temperature. Will disappear when the temperature returns to normal. Audio System Satellite Digital Radio Only on U.S. Cars Your Acura is capable of receiving CATEGORY MODE CHANNEL MODE INDICATOR INDICATOR XM Satellite Radio anywhere in the United States except Hawaii and PWR/VOL KNOB SAT BUTTON RADIO DISP BUTTON TUNE KNOB Alaska. XM is a registered trademark of XM Satellite Radio Inc. XM Satellite radio receives signals from two satellites, enhanced by ground-based repeaters, to produce clear, high-quality digital reception. It offers many channels in several categories. Along with a large selection of different types of music, satellite radio also allows you to view channel name, artist, song titles, and category selections in the audio display. MORE SCAN BUTTON PRESET BUTTONS CATEGORY Comfort and Convenience Features 173 Audio System Comfort and Convenience Features Operating Satellite Radio MORE ɻ The display allows you to see up to ten characters in an artist’s name or song title. XM’s system is set up to transmit up to 16 characters. Press the MORE button to see additional characters. DISP ɻ Each time you press and release the To listen to satellite radio, turn the DISP button, the display changes in ignition switch to ACCESSORY (I) the following sequence: channel or ON (II). Push the PWR/VOL name, channel number, category, knob to turn on the audio system, artist name, and music title. and press the SAT Radio button. Adjust the volume by turning the You may experience periods when volume knob. The last channel you XM Radio does not transmit the listened to will show in the display. artist’s name and the song title To change bands (XM1 or XM2), information. If this happens, there is press the SAT button again. To nothing wrong with your system. return to the AM and FM radio, press the AM/FM button. To switch between the channel mode and the category mode, press the DISP button until the mode changes. In the channel mode, you can receive all of the available channels. In the category mode, such as Jazz, Rock, Classical, etc., you can receive only the channels within that category. TUNE ɻ Turn the Tune knob left or right to select channels. In the category mode, you can only select channels within that category. CATEGORY ( ɻ or ɹ ) ɻ In the category mode, press either button to select another category. 174 Audio System SCAN ɻ The SCAN function gives To store a channel: 3. Pick the preset button you want you a sampling of all channels while Preset ɻ You can store up to 12 for that channel. Press and hold in the channel mode. In the category preset channels using the six preset the button until you hear a beep. mode, only the stations within that buttons. Each button stores one category are scanned. To activate channel from the XM1 band and one 4. Repeat steps 2 to 3 to store the SCAN, press the SCAN button. The channel from the XM2 band. first six channels. system plays each channel in numerical order for a few seconds, To store a channel: 5. Press the SAT Radio button again. then selects the next channel. When 1. Press the SAT Radio button until The available XM band will show. you hear a channel you want to XM1 or XM2 appears in the Store the next six channels using continue listening to, press the display. steps 2 through 3. button again. 2. Use the TUNE knob, or the Once a channel is stored, simply CATEGORY or SCAN buttons to press and release the proper preset tune to a desired channel. button to tune to it. In the category mode, only channels The presets will be lost if your car’s within that category can be selected. battery goes dead, is disconnected, In the channel mode, all channels or the radio fuse is removed. can be selected. CONTINUED Comfort and Convenience Features 175 Audio System Signal blocked may by be mountains or large to the obstacles south. SATELLITE GROUND REPEATER 176 Comfort and Convenience Features The XM satellites are in orbit over the equator; therefore, objects south of the vehicle may cause satellite reception interruptions. To help compensate for this, ground-based repeaters are placed in major metropolitan areas. Satellite signals are more likely to be blocked by tall buildings and mountains the farther north you travel from the equator. Depending on where you drive, you may experience reception problems. Interference can be caused by any of these conditions: Driving on the south side of an east/west mountain road Driving on the north side of a large commercial truck on an east/west road Driving in tunnels Driving on a road beside a vertical wall, steep cliff or hill to the south of you Driving on the lower level of a multi-tiered road Driving on a single lane road alongside dense trees taller than 50 ft. (15 m) to the south of you There may be other geographic situations that could affect satellite radio reception. Audio System As required by the FCC: Receiving Satellite Radio Service Changes or modifications not expressly If your XM Radio service has expired approved by the party responsible for or you purchased your car from a compliance could void the user’s previous owner, you can listen to a authority to operate the equipment. sampling of the broadcasts available on XM Satellite Radio. With the ignition switch in the ACCESSORY (I) or ON (II) position, push the PWR/VOL knob to turn on the audio system and press the SAT Radio button. A variety of music types and styles will play. CONTINUED Comfort and Convenience Features 177 Audio System If you decide to purchase XM While awaiting activation, make sure Remote Audio Controls Satellite Radio service, contact XM your vehicle remains in an open area Radio at www.xmradio.com, or at with good reception. Once your 1-800-852-9696. You will need to give audio system is activated, ‘‘category’’ them your radio I.D. number and or ‘‘CH’’ will appear in the display your credit card number. To get your and you’ll be able to listen to XM radio I.D. number, turn the TUNE Radio broadcasts. XM Radio will knob until ‘‘0’’ appears in the display. continue to send an activation signal Your I.D. will appear in the display. to your vehicle for at least 12 hours from activation request. If the After you’ve registered with XM service has not been activated after Radio, keep your audio system in the 36 hours, contact XM Radio. SAT Radio mode while you await activation. This should take about 30 minutes. 178 Comfort and Convenience Features AUDIO/CH BUTTON Two controls for the audio system are mounted in the steering wheel hub. These let you control basic functions without removing your hand from the wheel. The top and bottom buttons adjust the volume up ( ) or down ( ). Press the proper button and hold it until the desired volume is reached, then release it. The AUDIO/CH button has four functions, depending on whether you are listening to the radio or XM satellite radio, or playing a cassette or CD. If you are listening to the radio, use the AUDIO/CH button to change stations. Each time you press this button, the system advances to the next preset station on the band you are listening to. You will see the number of the selected Preset button in the display. To change bands, press the AM or FM button (without Navigation System), or AM/FM button (with Navigation System) on the audio system’s front panel. If you are playing a cassette, use the AUDIO/CH button to advance to the next selection. You will see ‘‘FF’’ blinking in the display when you press the AUDIO/CH button. The system fast forwards until it senses a silent period, then goes back to PLAY. If you are playing a CD, the system skips to the beginning of the next track each time you push the AUDIO/CH button. You will see the disc and track number in the display. Audio System U.S. Cars only If you are listening to satellite radio, you can also use the AUDIO/CH button to change channels. Each time you press this button, the system advances to the next preset channel on the band you are listening to. You will see the number of the selected Preset button in the display. To change bands (XM1 or XM2), press the SAT Radio button on the audio system’s front panel. Comfort and Convenience Features 179 Audio System Theft Protection Your car’s audio system will disable itself if it is disconnected from electrical power for any reason. To make it work again, the user must enter a specific five-digit code in the Preset buttons. Because there are hundreds of number combinations possible from five digits, making the system work without knowing the exact code is nearly impossible. You should have received a card that lists your audio system’s code number and serial number. It is best to store this card in a safe place at home. In addition, you should write the audio system’s serial number in this Owner’s Manual. If you should happen to lose the card, you must obtain the code number from your Acura dealer. To do this, you will need the system’s serial number. 180 Comfort and Convenience Features If your car’s battery is disconnected or goes dead, or the radio fuse is removed, the audio system will disable itself. If this happens, you will see ‘‘ ’’ in the frequency display the next time you turn on the system. Use the Preset buttons to enter the five-digit code. If it is entered correctly, the radio will start playing. If you make a mistake entering the code, do not start over or try to correct your mistake. Complete the five-digit sequence, then enter the correct code. You have three tries to enter the correct code. If you are unsuccessful in three attempts, you must then leave the system on for one hour before trying again. You will have to store your favorite stations in the Preset buttons after the system begins working. Your original settings were lost when power was disconnected. Security System The security system helps to protect your car and valuables from theft. SECURITY SYSTEM LIGHT With the system set, you can still open the trunk with the master key The horn sounds and a combination or the remote transmitter without of headlights, parking lights, side triggering the alarm. The alarm will marker lights and taillights flashes if sound if the trunk lock is forced, or someone attempts to break into your the trunk is opened with the trunk car or remove the radio. This alarm release button on the driver’s door. continues for two minutes, then the system resets. To reset an alarming The security system will not set if system before the two minutes have the hood, trunk, or any door is not elapsed, unlock either front door fully closed. If the system will not set, with the key or the remote check the Door and Trunk Open transmitter. Monitor on the instrument panel Once the security system is set, (see page 61 ), to see if the doors The security system sets auto- opening any door (without using the and trunk are fully closed. Since it is matically fifteen seconds after you key or the remote transmitter), or not part of the monitor display, lock the doors, hood, and trunk. For the hood, will cause it to alarm. It manually check the hood. the system to activate, you must lock also alarms if the radio is removed the doors from the outside with the from the dashboard or the wiring is Do not attempt to alter this system key, lock tab, door lock switch, or cut. or add other devices to it. remote transmitter. The security system light next to the driver’s door lock starts blinking immediately to show you the system is setting itself. Comfort and Convenience Features 181 Cruise Control Cruise control allows you to maintain Using the Cruise Control a set speed above 25 mph (40 km/h) without keeping your foot on the accelerator pedal. It should be used for cruising on straight, open highways. It is not recommended for conditions such as city driving, winding roads, slippery roads, heavy rain, or bad weather. You should have full control of the vehicle under those conditions. 1. 2. Comfort and Convenience Features Improper use of the cruise CRUISE CONTROL MASTER SWITCH control can lead to a crash. Use the cruise control only when traveling on open highways in good weather. Push in the Cruise Control Master Switch to the left of the steering column. The indicator in the switch will light. Accelerate to the desired cruising speed above 25 mph (40 km/h). 182 Cruise Control Comfort and Convenience Features The cruise control may not hold the set speed when you are going up and down hills. If your speed increases going down a hill, use the brakes to slow down to the desired speed. This will cancel the cruise control. To resume the set speed, press the RESUME/accel button. The CRUISE CONTROL light on the instrument panel comes on. When climbing a steep hill, the automatic transmission may downshift to hold the set speed. Changing the Set Speed You can increase the set cruising speed in any of these ways: Press and hold the RESUME/ accel button. The vehicle will accelerate. When you reach the desired cruising speed, release the button. Push on the accelerator pedal. Accelerate to the desired cruising speed and press the SET/decel button. To increase your speed in very small amounts, tap the RESUME/ accel button repeatedly. Each time you do this, your car will speed up about 1 mph (1.6 km/h). RESUME/ accel BUTTON SET/decel BUTTON Press 3. and release the SET/decel button on the steering wheel. The CRUISE CONTROL light on the instrument panel comes on to show the system is now activated. CONTINUED 183 Cruise Control You can decrease the set cruising speed in any of these ways: Press and hold the SET/decel button. The vehicle will decelerate. Release the button when you reach the desired speed. Tap the brake pedal lightly with your foot. The CRUISE CONTROL light on the instru- ment panel will go out. When the vehicle slows to the desired speed, press the SET/decel button. The vehicle will then maintain the desired speed. To slow down in very small amounts, tap the SET/decel button repeatedly. Each time you do this, your car will slow down about 1 mph (1.6 km/h). 184 Comfort and Convenience Features Resting your foot on the brake pedal will cause the cruise control to cancel. Even with the cruise control turned on, you can still use the accelerator pedal to speed up for passing. After completing the pass, take your foot off the accelerator pedal. The vehicle will return to the set cruising speed. You can cancel the cruise control in any of these ways: Tap the brake pedal. Push the CANCEL button on the steering wheel. Press the Cruise Control Master Switch. Cancelling the Cruise Control CANCEL BUTTON When you push the CANCEL button, or tap the brake pedal, the CRUISE CONTROL light on the instrument panel will go out and the vehicle will begin to slow down. You can use the accelerator pedal in the normal way. The system remembers the previously-set cruising speed. To return to that speed, accelerate to above 25 mph (40 km/h), then press and release the RESUME/accel button. The CRUISE CONTROL light comes on, and the vehicle will accelerate to the same cruising speed as before. Pressing the Cruise Control Master Switch turns the system completely off and erases the previous cruising speed from memory. To use the system again, refer to Using the Cruise Control . Cruise Control Comfort and Convenience Features 185 HomeLink Universal Transceiver The HomeLink Universal Important Safety Precautions General Information Transceiver built into your car can Always refer to the operating If you are training HomeLink to be programmed to operate remotely- instructions and safety information operate a garage door or gate, it is controlled devices around your home, that came with your garage door recommended that you unplug the such as garage doors, lighting, or opener or other equipment you motor for that device during home security systems. It can intend to operate with the HomeLink training. Repeatedly pressing the replace up to three remote Universal Transceiver. If you do not remote control button could burn transmitters. have this information, you should out the motor. contact the manufacturer of the Customer Assistance equipment. HomeLink stores the code in a If you have problems with training permanent memory. There should the HomeLink Universal Transceiver, While training or using HomeLink, be no need to retrain HomeLink if or would like information on home make sure you have a clear view of your car’s battery goes dead or is products that can be operated by the the garage door or gate, and that no disconnected. transmitter, call (800) 355-3515. On one will be injured by its movement. the Internet, go to www.homelink. If your garage door opener was com. manufactured before April 1982, you may not be able to program HomeLink is a registered HomeLink to operate it. Garage door trademark of Johnson Controls TM . openers manufactured before that date do not have a safety feature that causes them to stop and reverse if an obstacle is detected during closing, increasing the risk of injury. If you have questions, call (800) 355-3515. 186 Comfort and Convenience Features HomeLink Universal Transceiver Training HomeLink Before you begin ɻ If you just took If you are training the second or Before you can use HomeLink to delivery of your car and have not third buttons, go directly to Step 1. operate devices around your home, it trained any of the buttons in must ‘‘learn’’ the proper codes. For HomeLink before, you should erase 1. Unplug the garage door opener example, to train HomeLink to open any previously learned codes before motor from the house current. and close the garage door: training the first button. To do this, press and hold the two outside 2. Hold the end of the garage door buttons on the HomeLink opener remote control 2 to 5 transceiver for about 20 seconds, inches from HomeLink. Make until the red light flashes. Release sure you are not blocking your the buttons, then proceed to Step 1. view of the red light in HomeLink. CONTINUED Comfort and Convenience Features 187 HomeLink Universal Transceiver Comfort and Convenience Features Cars without Navigation System 3. Select the HomeLink button you want to train. 4. Press the button on the remote control and the button on HomeLink at the same time. Hold down both buttons. 188 The remote control you are training from may stop transmitting after two seconds. This is not long enough for HomeLink to learn the code. Release and press the button on the remote control every two seconds until HomeLink has learned the code. 5. The red light in HomeLink should begin flashing. It will flash slowly at first, then rapidly. 6. When the red light flashes rapidly, release both buttons. HomeLink should have learned the code from the remote control. 7. Plug in the garage door opener motor, then test the HomeLink transceiver button by pushing it. It should operate the garage door. Canadian Owners: If the button does not work, repeat this procedure to train it again. If it still does not work, you may have a variable or rolling code garage door opener. Test this by pressing and holding the HomeLink transceiver button you just trained. If the red light blinks for two seconds, then stays on, you have a rolling code garage door opener. You may be able to verify this with the manufacturer’s documentation. Go to ‘‘Training With a Rolling Code System.’’ HomeLink Universal Transceiver 8. Repeat these steps to train the Training With a Rolling Code other two HomeLink buttons to System operate any other remotely- For security purposes, newer garage controlled devices around your door opening systems use a ‘‘rolling’’ home (lighting, automatic gate, or variable code. Information from security system, etc.). the remote control and the garage door opener are needed before HomeLink can operate the garage door opener. The ‘‘Training HomeLink’’ procedure trains HomeLink to the proper garage door opener code. The following procedure synchronizes HomeLink to the garage door opener so they send and receive the correct codes. CONTINUED Comfort and Convenience Features 189 HomeLink Universal Transceiver It may be helpful to have someone assist you with this procedure. TRAINING BUTTON 1. Make sure you have properly completed the ‘‘Training HomeLink’’ procedure. 2. Find the ‘‘Training’’ button on your garage door opener unit. The location will vary, depending on the manufacturer. The manufacturer’s documentation may help. 3. Press the Training button on the garage door opener unit until the light next to the button comes on, then release it. The light may blink, or come on and stay on. You then have approximately 30 seconds to complete the following steps. 190 Comfort and Convenience Features 6. 4. 5. Press and hold the button on HomeLink for 3 ɻ 4 seconds. (The same button you trained with the ‘‘Training HomeLink’’ procedure.) Press and hold the HomeLink button again for 3 ɻ 4 seconds. This should turn off the training light on the garage door opener unit. (Some systems may require you to press the button up to three times.) Press the HomeLink button again. It should operate the garage door. To train an already programmed HomeLink button to operate a new device: 1. Select the HomeLink button you want to train. 2. Press and hold the HomeLink button until the red light begins to flash slowly (approximately 20 seconds). 3. While continuing to hold the HomeLink button, place the remote control for the device 2 to 5 inches from HomeLink. 4. Press and hold the button on the remote control. Hold both buttons until the red light begins to flash rapidly. Retraining a Button HomeLink Universal Transceiver 5. Release both buttons. HomeLink As required by the FCC: should now be trained to operate This device complies with Part 15 of the the device. FCC rules. Operation is subject to the following two conditions: (1) This device Erasing Codes may not cause harmful interference, and To erase the codes stored in all three (2) this device must accept any buttons, press and hold the two interference received, including outside buttons until the red light interference that may cause undesired begins to flash, then release the operation. buttons. Changes or modifications not expressly You should erase all three codes approved by the party responsible for before selling the vehicle. compliance could void the user’s authority to operate the equipment. This device complies with Industry Canada Standard RSS-210. Operation is subject to the following two conditions: (1) this device may not cause interference, and (2) this device must accept any interference that may cause undesired operation of the device. Comfort and Convenience Features 191 OnStar U.S. models only OnStar Control Panel OnStar Services Button The OnStar system in your car gives you access to a wide range of services and information with the touch of a button. An OnStar advisor is available 24 hours a day, 7 days a week. Stolen Vehicle Tracking. Misplaced Vehicle Assistance. Comfort and Convenience Features Press this button to contact an OnStar advisor. You will hear a chime, followed by the announcement, ‘‘Connecting to OnStar.’’ The connection should take 20 to 30 seconds. The advisor will assist you with any of the services included in your plan. Depending on what service you request, you may need to give your Personal Identification Number (PIN) to the advisor. Your PIN is a number you make up and provide when you establish your OnStar service. If cellular telephone service is not available in the area you are driving in, you will hear a fast busy signal. The system will retry the connection several times before returning to the ready mode. Personal Concierge Services. CALL ANSWER/END SYSTEM STATUS LIGHT BUTTON The Safe and Sound Plan provides: Roadside Assistance. Emergency Services. Automatic Notification of Airbag Deployment. Accident Assist. OnStar BUTTON Remote Door Locking/Unlocking. EMERGENCY BUTTON The OnStar buttons and indicator are located on the ceiling near the Online Concierge Services. front ceiling light. The Directions and Connections Plan provides these additional features: Route Support. Ride Assist. Information and Convenience Services. The Luxury and Leisure Plan adds: 192 To cancel these retries, press the Call Answer/End (DOT) button. A microphone is located in the base of the OnStar control panel so you can speak to the advisor without taking your hands off the steering wheel or diverting your attention from the road. The OnStar advisor’s voice comes from the audio system’s speakers. Use the volume control on the audio system or on the steering wheel to adjust the volume. Emergency Button Press this button to contact an OnStar advisor only if you have an emergency situation. You will hear a tone, followed by the announcement, ‘‘Connecting to OnStar Emergency.’’ Your call is given highest priority. OnStar The advisor will ask about the nature System Status Light of the emergency, locate your car, This light shows you the status of and notify the appropriate the system. emergency service agencies. Solid Green ɻ The system is ready If you press this button accidentally, for use. do not cancel the call. Wait until the OnStar advisor answers, then explain Blinking Green ɻ A call is in your mistake. progress. Call Answer/End Button Solid Red ɻ There is a problem in the system. Press the OnStar button Press this ‘‘DOT’’ button to end a call to contact an advisor. If the call to the OnStar advisor, or to cancel connects, the advisor will assist you the call if you should press one of with verifying the system’s operation. the other buttons accidentally. If the If you are not able to contact an OnStar center should call you, press advisor, take your car to an Acura this button to answer the call. dealer to have the system diagnosed. This button is also used to initiate Blinking Red ɻ There is a problem the Personal Calling and Virtual in the system with a call in progress. Advisor services, if you have subscribed. Comfort and Convenience Features 193 OnStar Safe and Sound Plan Features Automatic Notification of Airbag Remote Door Locking/Unlocking The OnStar system uses the Global Deployment ɻ If you are ever in an ɻ By sending a signal to your car, Positioning System (GPS) to locate accident that causes the airbags to the advisor can lock or unlock your your car whenever you place a call. deploy, the OnStar system car’s doors. This is helpful if you are This allows the advisor to quickly automatically places a call (provided away from your car and realize you contact the nearest services without the OnStar system and your car’s forgot to lock the doors, or if you requiring you to provide detailed electrical system are still intact). The have locked the keys in your car. To directions. advisor will attempt to speak to you get OnStar’s assistance, call (888) 4- to evaluate the situation, and contact ONSTAR (466-7827). Roadside Assistance ɻ Contact the nearest emergency services the OnStar advisor if you need provider. Stolen Vehicle Tracking ɻ Using assistance with a problem (flat tire, GPS, OnStar can locate your car out of fuel, etc.) while traveling. The almost anywhere. If your car is ever advisor will contact an appropriate stolen, contact OnStar at (888) agency to come and assist you. 4-ONSTAR. The advisor will put you in contact with the proper authorities, Emergency Services ɻ Contact an and assist them with locating your OnStar advisor if you have an car. emergency situation. The advisor will contact the nearest emergency services provider (ambulance, fire department, etc.) and advise them of your situation. Comfort and Convenience Features Accident Assist ɻ The OnStar advisor can help you if you are ever in a minor accident by asking you for information about the accident. Complete, detailed information will make it easier to complete accident reports and insurance claims. 194 OnStar Misplaced Vehicle Assistance ɻ Directions and Connections Plan Luxury and Leisure Plan If you are unable to locate your car in Features Features a large parking lot or parking The Directions and Connections The Luxury and Leisure plan structure, contact OnStar at (888) 4- Plan provides these additional provides all the benefits of the other ONSTAR. The advisor will remotely features. plans, and adds: activate the exterior lights and the horn, allowing you to locate your car. Personal Concierge Services An OnStar advisor can assist you with purchasing theater tickets, airline tickets, rental car reservations for a vacation, and just about any other purchase you desire. Information and Convenience Services The OnStar advisor can give you information on nearby hotels, restaurants, ATMs, hospitals, gas stations, and many other services in any area you are traveling in. The advisor can also help you with hotel or restaurant reservations. Comfort and Convenience Features ɻ ɻ ɻ ɻ The OnStar advisor can give you verbal directions from your current location From your computer, you can log to a desired destination. into www. myonstar.com to make dinner reservations, purchase tickets to events, send flowers, etc. Route Support Online Concierge Services Ride Assist ɻ If you need a ride (taxi, limousine service, etc.) the OnStar advisor can make the arrangements for you. Use the OnStar button or call (888) 4-ONSTAR. 195 OnStar Personal Calling Placing a Telephone Call ɻ You OnStar will respond with ‘‘Dialing’’ The OnStar Personal Calling plan is must use voice commands to give and then repeat the complete an extra-cost option that gives you the OnStar system your calling telephone number. It will then the ability to use your car’s OnStar information. To make a phone call: place the telephone call. system as a hands-free cellular telephone. Press the Call Answer/End (DOT) Button. To sign up for Personal Calling, OnStar will respond with ‘‘Ready.’’ press the OnStar button in your car, Say ‘‘Dial.’’ and notify the advisor that you’d like OnStar will respond with ‘‘Number to sign up. The advisor will get all Please.’’ the information needed to set up Say the first digit of the number. your account, and provide you with OnStar will repeat that digit. your new cellular telephone number. Always wait for OnStar to confirm You will need to provide a credit card the digit before going to the next number, and prepurchase ‘‘units’’ or digit. minutes of air time (one unit equals Say the second digit of the number. one minute). OnStar will repeat that digit. Continue this until you have given OnStar the complete telephone number. Then say ‘‘Dial.’’ Comfort and Convenience Features When you have finished your conversation, press the DOT button again to hang up. If you make a mistake speaking a digit of the phone number, or the system responds with the wrong digit, say ‘‘Clear.’’ This will cause the system to erase the last digit. If you need to cancel the phone call attempt before entering the complete phone number, say ‘‘Cancel.’’ The system will cancel the operation and return to Ready. If the system has difficulty understanding a voice command, it can respond with: 196 OnStar ‘‘Pardon’’ ɻ The system could not Incoming Telephone Calls ɻ Storing a Nametag ɻ To store a match your voice command to one it When someone places a telephone telephone number and its nametag in knows. Repeat the command call to you, the audio system will the system: distinctly. mute and you will hear the ring. Press the DOT button to answer the Press the DOT button. ‘‘Slower please’’ ɻ The system call. When you have completed the OnStar will respond with ‘‘Ready.’’ missed the command because it was call, press the DOT button again to Say ‘‘Store.’’ not yet ready for it, or there was too hang up. OnStar will respond with ‘‘Number much background noise. Repeat the Please.’’ command after a short pause. Using Nametags Say the first digit of the number. The OnStar system can store up to OnStar will repeat that digit. Voice Feedback On/Off ɻ With twenty 32-digit telephone numbers in Say the second digit of the number. voice feedback off, the system will its memory. When you store these OnStar will repeat that digit. respond with a tone rather than numbers in its memory, you give Continue this until you have given ‘‘Ready,’’ or repeating each number each one a nametag. When you want OnStar the complete telephone you say. Other responses will still be to place a telephone call, you can number. Then say ‘‘Store’’ again. by voice. To turn voice feedback on recall the number by giving the OnStar will respond with or off: system the nametag. ‘‘Nametag Please.’’ Say the name that you want Press the DOT button. assigned to that telephone number. OnStar will respond with ‘‘Ready.’’ OnStar will respond with ‘‘Again.’’ Say ‘‘Voice Feedback.’’ Repeat the nametag. OnStar will respond with ‘‘Voice OnStar will respond with ‘‘Once feedback On/Off.’’ more.’’ CONTINUED Comfort and Convenience Features 197 OnStar Repeat the nametag. ɻ ɻ To redial OnStar will respond with ‘‘Storing the last telephone number you nametag ʼ .’’ called: ɻ To Press the DOT button. place a telephone call using a OnStar will respond with ‘‘Ready.’’ nametag: Say ‘‘Redial.’’ OnStar will respond with Press the DOT button. ‘‘Redialing,’’ then place the OnStar will respond with ‘‘Ready.’’ telephone call. Say ‘‘Call.’’ OnStar will respond with ‘‘Nametag Please.’’ ʻ ʼ By giving the system a security code Say the nametag for the number that you make up, you can lock out you want to call. the Personal Calling and Virtual OnStar will respond with ‘‘Calling ʻ ʼ Advisor capabilities of the system so nametag ʼ ,’’ then place the unauthorized people cannot make telephone call. telephone calls. To turn security on or off: If you have forgotten what nametags you have stored, the system will read them to you. Press the DOT button. When the system responds with ‘‘Ready,’’ say ‘‘Directory.’’ Comfort and Convenience Features Deleting a Nametag To delete a Redialing a Number nametag and telephone number from memory: Placing a Telephone Call Press the DOT button. OnStar will respond with ‘‘Ready.’’ Say ‘‘Delete.’’ OnStar will respond with ‘‘Nametag Please.’’ Say the nametag for the number you want to delete. OnStar will respond with ‘‘Delete Security Code nametag , Yes or No.’’ Say ‘‘Yes.’’ OnStar will respond with ‘‘Deleting nametag .’’ 198 OnStar Press the DOT button. Keeping Track of Units Adding Units ɻ To purchase more OnStar will respond with ‘‘Ready.’’ You must prepurchase units units of cellular air time: Say ‘‘Security.’’ (minutes) of cellular air time. The OnStar will respond with ‘‘Enter OnStar system tracks how many Press the DOT button. four-digit security code.’’ units you have remaining. OnStar will respond with ‘‘Ready.’’ Say the first digit of the code. Say ‘‘Units.’’ OnStar will repeat that digit. To find out how many units you have OnStar will respond with ‘‘Verify Say the second digit of the code. remaining: or add.’’ OnStar will repeat that digit. Say ‘‘Add.’’ Say the third digit of the code. Press the DOT button. OnStar will connect you to an OnStar will repeat that digit. OnStar will respond with ‘‘Ready.’’ advisor to handle your purchase. Say the fourth digit of the code. Say ‘‘Units.’’ OnStar will respond with ‘‘Security OnStar will respond with ‘‘Verify You can also call OnStar at (888) 4- code number ʼ is now ON/OFF.’’ or add.’’ ONSTAR, or get information about Say ‘‘Verify.’’ your account at the OnStar web site, If you forget the security code OnStar will respond with ‘‘You www.onstar.com. entered, or someone else enters a have number ʼ units remaining.’’ security code unknown to you, you must contact an OnStar advisor to reset the code. Press the OnStar button, or call (888) 4-ONSTAR. Comfort and Convenience Features 199 OnStar OnStar Virtual Advisor If you do not have Internet access, a Personal Identification Number When you subscribe to Personal default profile can be set up for you. You make up and provide your Calling, you can also enjoy the Personal Identification Number benefits of Virtual Advisor. This To use the Virtual Advisor from your (PIN) when you establish your feature lets you hear information in car: account with OnStar. You should your car about weather, sports, news, write down your PIN and keep it and stocks. It is even possible to with you at all times. have your e-mail read to you. You can change your PIN at any time. Contact the OnStar advisor by The system will connect you to the pressing the OnStar button, or by Virtual Advisor. The Virtual Advisor calling (888) 4-ONSTAR. will prompt you for the information you desire. If you forget your PIN, contact the OnStar advisor. For security reasons, If you would like to hear a list of your PIN will be mailed to you. voice commands that are available, say ‘‘Help.’’ OnStar is continually upgrading the system, and new commands become available. Comfort and Convenience Features Press the DOT button. OnStar will respond with ‘‘Ready.’’ Say ‘‘Virtual Advisor.’’ Although Virtual Advisor can provide information on many subjects, you can set up a customized profile with OnStar that makes it easier to get information about areas that are of specific interest to you. To do this, you must go to the OnStar web site, www. onstar.com. This is a secure site; you will need your account number and PIN to access your account information and to design your customized profile. 200 OnStar uses the Global Positioning System (GPS) to locate your car for functions such as route guidance and roadside assistance. GPS is affected by structures that can obstruct the signal, such as tunnels, parking structures, and tall buildings. It may not be possible for OnStar to pinpoint your location if you are in or near such structures. OnStar uses cellular technology to communicate with your car. Cellular coverage varies by location, which may affect the ability to establish a connection, or the quality of the connection. System Limitations OnStar When you turn off your car’s ignition, As required by the FCC: the OnStar system goes into low- This device complies with Part 15 of the power mode. After 48 hours, it FCC rules. Operation is subject to the switches to sleep mode to conserve following two conditions: (1) This device your car’s battery power. Features may not cause harmful interference, and such as remote door unlocking and (2) this device must accept any misplaced vehicle assistance will not interference received, including work after your car has been parked interference that may cause undesired for more that 48 hours. operation. Changes or modifications not expressly approved by the party responsible for compliance could void the user’s authority to operate the equipment. This device complies with Industry Canada Standard RSS-210. Operation is subject to the following two conditions: (1) this device may not cause interference, and (2) this device must accept any interference that may cause undesired operation of the device. OnStar is a registered trademark of the OnStar Corporation. Comfort and Convenience Features 201 202 Before you begin driving your Acura, you should know what gasoline to use, and how to check the levels of important fluids. You also need to know how to properly store luggage or packages. The information in this section will help you. If you plan to add any accessories to your car, please read the information in this section first. Before Driving Break-in Period ............................. . 204 Gasoline ......................................... . 204 Service Station Procedures ......... . 205 Filling the Fuel Tank ................ . 205 Opening the Hood .................... . 206 Oil Check ............................... . 207 Engine Coolant Check ......... . 208 Fuel Economy ............................... . 209 Vehicle Condition ..................... . 209 Driving Habits ........................... . 209 Accessories and Modifications ... . 210 Carrying Cargo ............................. . 212 Before Driving 203 Break-in Period, Gasoline Break-in Period Gasoline Help assure your car’s future Your Acura is designed to operate on reliability and performance by paying premium unleaded gasoline with a extra attention to how you drive pump octane number of 91 or higher. during the first 600 miles (1,000 km). During this period: If you are unable to find premium unleaded gasoline, you may substi- Avoid full-throttle starts and rapid tute an unleaded regular gasoline. acceleration. The engine will compensate for the lower octane, but you may notice a Avoid hard braking. New brakes slight decrease in power as a result. need to be broken-in by moderate use for the first 200 miles (300 We recommend gasolines containing km). detergent additives that help prevent fuel system and engine deposits. Do not change the oil until the recommended time or mileage Using gasoline containing lead will interval shown in the maintenance damage your car’s emissions schedule. controls. This contributes to air pollution. You should follow these same re- commendations with an overhauled or exchanged engine, or when the brakes are relined. 204 Before Driving In Canada, some gasolines contain an octane-enhancing additive called MMT. If you use such gasolines, your emissions control system performance may deteriorate and the Malfunction Indicator Lamp on your instrument panel may turn on. If this happens, contact your authorized Acura dealer for service. 1. 2. Filling the Fuel Tank Open the fuel fill door by pulling on the handle to the left of the driver’s seat. Because the fuel fill cap is on the driver’s side of the vehicle, park with that side closest to the service station pumps. Gasoline is highly flammable and explosive. You can be Pull burned or seriously injured when handling fuel. Stop the engine and keep heat, sparks, and flame away. Handle fuel only outdoors. Wipe up spills immediately. FUEL FILL CAP Service Station Procedures 3. Remove the fuel fill cap slowly. You may hear a hissing sound as pressure inside the tank escapes. Place the cap in the holder on the fuel fill door. 4. Stop filling the tank after the fuel nozzle automatically clicks off. Do not try to ‘‘top off’’ the tank, leave some room for the fuel to expand with temperature changes. Your car has an on-board refueling vapor recovery system to help keep fuel vapors from going into the atmosphere. If the fuel nozzle keeps clicking off even though the tank is not full, there may be a problem with this system. Consult your dealer. CONTINUED Before Driving 205 Service Station Procedures 5. Screw the fuel fill cap back on, Opening the Hood tighten it until it clicks at least three times. If you do not properly tighten the cap, the Malfunction Indicator Lamp may come on (see page ). 6. 1. 2. 206 Before Driving HOOD RELEASE HANDLE 323 Push the fuel fill door closed until it latches. LATCH HANDLE Shift to Park or Neutral and set Standing in front of the vehicle, the parking brake. Pull the hood reach in between the hood and the release handle located under the front bumper with your finger. lower left corner of the dashboard. Slide the latch handle. The hood will pop up slightly. If you can open the hood without sliding the hood latch handle, or the hood latch handle moves stiffly or does not spring back as before, the mechanism should be cleaned and lubricated (see page ). Lift the hood up most of the way. The hydraulic supports will lift it up the rest of the way and hold it up. To close the hood, lower it to about a foot (30 cm) above the fender, then press down firmly with your hands. After closing the hood, make sure it is securely latched. 267 3. Service Station Procedures Oil Check DIPSTICK Check the engine oil level every time 2. Wipe the dipstick with a clean you fill the vehicle with fuel. Wait a cloth or paper towel. few minutes after turning the engine off before you check the oil. 1. Remove the dipstick (orange handle). CONTINUED Before Driving 207 Service Station Procedures Before Driving Engine Coolant Check 208 RESERVE TANK UPPER MARK LOWER MARK MAX MIN 3. Insert it all the way back in its tube. 4. Remove the dipstick again and Look at the coolant level in the check the level. It should be radiator reserve tank. Make sure it is between the upper and lower between the MAX and MIN lines. If marks. it is below the MIN line, see on page for If it is near or below the lower mark, information on adding the proper see on page 253 . coolant. Adding Engine Coolant Adding Oil 257 Refer to on page 251 for information on checking other items in your Acura. Owner Maintenance Checks The condition of your car and your driving habits are the two most important things that affect the fuel mileage you get. Always maintain your car according to the maintenance schedule. This will keep it in top operating condition. In winter, the build-up of snow on your car’s underside adds weight and rolling resistance. Frequent cleaning helps your fuel mileage and reduces the chance of corrosion. Driving Habits Owner Maintenance Checks You can improve fuel economy by driving moderately. Rapid acceler- ation, abrupt cornering, and hard braking use more fuel. Vehicle Condition Always drive in the highest gear that allows the engine to run and acceler- ate smoothly. An important part of that mainte- nance is the (see page ). For example, an underinflated tire causes more ‘‘rolling resistance,’’ which uses fuel. It also wears out faster, so check the tire pressure at least monthly. Depending on traffic conditions, try to maintain a constant speed. Every 251 time you slow down and speed up, your car uses extra fuel. Use the cruise control, when appropriate, to increase fuel economy. Fuel Economy A cold engine uses more fuel than a warm engine. It is not necessary to ‘‘warm-up’’ a cold engine by letting it idle for a long time. You can drive away in about a minute, no matter how cold it is outside. The engine will warm up faster, and you get better fuel economy. To cut down on the number of ‘‘cold starts,’’ try to combine several short trips into one. The air conditioning puts an extra load on the engine which makes it use more fuel. For better fuel economy, either turn off the A/C or switch the A/C to the economy mode. Use the flow-through ventilation when the outside air temperature is moderate. Before Driving 209 Accessories and Modifications Modifying your car, or installing However, if electronic accessories some non-Acura accessories, can are improperly installed, or exceed make your car unsafe. Before you Improper accessories or your car’s electrical system capacity, make any modifications or add any modifications can affect your they can interfere with the operation accessories, be sure to read the car’s handling, stability, and of your car, or even cause the following information. performance, and cause a airbags to deploy. crash in which you can be hurt Accessories or killed. Before installing any accessory: Your dealer has Acura accessories that allow you to personalize your car. Follow all instructions in this Make sure the accessory does not These accessories have been owner’s manual regarding obscure any lights, or interfere designed and approved for your car, accessories and modifications. with proper vehicle operation or and are covered by warranty. performance. Non-Acura accessories are usually When properly installed, cellular designed for universal applications. phones, alarms, two-way radios, and Although aftermarket accessories low-powered audio systems should may fit on your car, they may not not interfere with your car’s meet factory specifications, and computer-controlled systems, such could adversely affect your car’s as the SRS and anti-lock brake handling and stability. (See system. ‘‘Modifications’’ on page 211 for additional information.) If possible, have your dealer inspect the final installation. Before Driving Be sure electronic accessories do not overload electrical circuits (see page 328 ). Have the installer contact your Acura dealer for assistance before installing any electronic accessory. 210 Accessories and Modifications Modifications Larger or smaller wheels and tires Do not attach hard objects on or Removing parts from your vehicle, can interfere with the operation of near a front door. If a side airbag or replacing components with non- your vehicle’s anti-lock brakes and inflates, a cup holder or other hard Acura (aftermarket) components other systems. object attached on or near the could seriously affect your vehicle’s door could be propelled inside the handling, stability, and reliability. Do not modify your steering wheel vehicle and hurt someone. or any other part of your Some examples are: Supplemental Restraint System. Do not place any objects over the Lowering the vehicle with an Modifications could make the outside edge of a front seat-back. aftermarket suspension kit that system ineffective. Covering the outside edge of a significantly reduces ground front seat-back, with a non-Acura clearance can allow the If you plan to modify your vehicle, seat cover for example, could undercarriage to impact speed consult with your Acura dealer. prevent the airbag from inflating bumps or other raised objects, properly. which could cause the airbags to Additional Safety Precautions deploy. Do not attach or place objects on the front airbag covers. Any object Raising the vehicle with an attached to or placed on the covers aftermarket suspension kit can marked ‘‘SRS AIRBAG,’’ in the affect the handling and stability. center of the steering wheel and on top of the dashboard, could Aftermarket wheels, because they interfere with the proper operation are a universal design, can cause of the airbags. Or, if the airbags excessive stress on suspension inflate, the objects could be components. propelled inside the vehicle and hurt someone. Before Driving 211 Carrying Cargo CONSOLE COMPARTMENT FRONT DOOR POCKET TRUNK SEAT-BACK POCKETS GLOVE BOX 212 Before Driving Your car has several convenient storage areas so you can stow cargo safely. The glove box, and the pockets in the front doors and seat-backs, are designed for small, lightweight items. The trunk is intended for larger, heavier items. In addition, the trunk pass-through allows you to carry longer items. However, carrying too much cargo, or improperly storing it, can affect your car’s handling, stability, stopping distance, and tires, and make it unsafe. Before carrying any type of cargo, be sure to read the following pages. Subtract Load Limit 3. the combined weight of The maximum load limit for your car the driver and passengers from is 850 lbs (395 kg). 850 lbs (395 kg). This figure includes the total weight of all occupants, cargo, accessories, 4. The resulting figure equals the and the tongue weight if you are available amount of cargo and towing a trailer. luggage load capacity. Following are the steps for For example, if there will be four 150 determining the correct cargo and lbs occupants in your car, the luggage load limit. amount of available cargo and luggage load capacity is 250 lbs. 1. Locate the statement, ‘‘the 4 w 150 lbs = 600 lbs combined weight of occupants and 850 lbs ɻ 600 lbs = 250 lbs cargo should never exceed 850 lbs (395 kg)’’ on your car’s placard (on 5. Determine the combined weight the driver’s doorjamb). of accessories, luggage, and cargo being loaded in the vehicle. The 2. Determine the combined weight weight may not safely exceed the of the driver and passengers that available cargo and luggage load will be riding in your car. (Five is capacity calculated in step 4 (250 the seating capacity of your car.) lbs in this example). 6. Carrying Cargo Overloading or improper loading can affect handling and stability and cause a crash in which you can be hurt or killed. Follow all load limits and other loading guidelines in this manual. If your car will be towing a trailer, load from your trailer will be transferred to your car. Consult this manual to determine how this reduces the available cargo and luggage load capacity of your car. Before Driving 213 Carrying Cargo Carrying Items in the Passenger Compartment Store or secure all items that could be thrown around and hurt someone during a crash. Do not put any items on top of the rear shelf. They can block your view and be thrown around the vehicle during a crash. Be sure items placed on the floor behind the front seats cannot roll under the seats and interfere with the driver’s ability to operate the pedals, or with the proper operation of the seats. Keep the glove box closed while driving. If it is open, a passenger could injure their knees during a crash or sudden stop. 214 Before Driving Carrying Cargo in the Trunk or on a Roof Rack Distribute cargo evenly on the floor of the trunk, placing the heaviest items on the bottom and as far forward as possible. If you carry large items that prevent you from closing the trunk lid, exhaust gas can enter the passenger area. To avoid the possibility of carbon monoxide poisoning , follow the instructions on page 53 . If you can carry any items on a roof rack, be sure the total weight of the rack and the items does not exceed the maximum allowable weight. Please contact your Acura dealer for further information. This section gives you tips on starting the engine under various conditions, and how to operate the automatic transmission. It also includes important information on parking your car, the braking system, the Vehicle Stability Assist System, and facts you need if you are planning to tow a trailer. Driving Preparing to Drive ........................ . 216 Starting the Engine ....................... . 217 Starting in Cold Weather at High Altitude .................... . 217 Automatic Transmission .............. . 218 Shift Lever Position Indicator . . 218 Shift Lever Positions ................ . 218 Engine Speed Limiter .............. . 220 Shift Lock Release .................... . 221 Parking ........................................... . 222 The Braking System ..................... . 223 Brake Wear Indicators ............. . 223 Brake System Design ............... . 224 Anti-lock Brakes ....................... . 224 Important Safety Reminders ......................... . 225 ABS Indicator ........................ . 225 Vehicle Stability Assist (VSA) System ........................................ . 227 Driving in Bad Weather ............... . 230 Towing a Trailer ........................... . 232 Driving 215 Preparing to Drive You should do the following checks Turn the ignition switch ON (II). and adjustments every day before Check the indicator lights in the you drive your car. instrument panel. Start the engine (see page ). Check the gauges and indicator lights in the instrument panel (see page ). Visually check the tires. If a tire looks low, use a gauge to check its pressure. Check that any items you may be carrying with you inside are stored properly or fastened down securely. Driving 5. Check the adjustment of the seat 10. (see page ). 6. 1. 11. 12. 7. 2. 8. 3. 9. 15 4. 91 Check the adjustment of the Make sure all windows, mirrors, inside and outside mirrors (see 217 and outside lights are clean and page 96 ). unobstructed. Remove frost, snow, or ice. Check the adjustment of the steering wheel (see page 76 ). 57 Check that the hood and trunk are fully closed. Make sure the doors are securely closed and locked. Fasten your seat belt. Check that your passengers have fastened their seat belts (see page ). 216 1. 2. 3. 4. 5. Apply the parking brake. In cold weather, turn off all electrical accessories to reduce the drain on the battery. Make sure the shift lever is in Park. Press on the brake pedal. Without touching the accelerator pedal, turn the ignition key to the START (III) position. If the engine does not start right away, do not hold the key in START (III) for more than 15 seconds at a time. Pause for at least 10 seconds before trying again. If the engine does not start within 15 seconds, or starts but stalls right away, repeat step 4 with the accelerator pedal pressed half-way down. If the engine starts, release pressure on the accelerator pedal so the engine does not race. Starting the Engine 6. If the engine still does not start, 2. Push the accelerator pedal half- press the accelerator pedal all the way to the floor and hold it there way down and hold it there while while starting the engine. Do not starting in order to clear flooding. hold the ignition key in START As before, keep the ignition key in (III) for more than 15 seconds. the START (III) position for no When the engine starts, release more than 15 seconds. Return to the accelerator pedal gradually as step 5 if the engine does not start. the engine speeds up and smooths If it starts, lift your foot off the out. accelerator pedal so the engine does not race. 3. If the engine fails to start in step 2, push the accelerator pedal to the Starting in Cold Weather at High floor and hold it there while you Altitude (Above 8,000 feet/ try to start the engine for no more 2,400 meters) than 15 seconds. If the engine An engine is harder to start in cold does not start, return to step 2. weather. The thinner air found at high altitude above 8,000 feet (2,400 meters) adds to the problem. Use the following procedure: 1. Turn off all electrical accessories to reduce the drain on the battery. Driving 217 Automatic Transmission Your Acura’s transmission has four Shift Lever Positions forward speeds, and is electronically controlled for smoother shifting. It also has a ‘‘lock-up’’ torque converter for better fuel economy. You may feel what seems like another shift when the converter locks. This indicator between the fuel gauge and temperature gauge shows which position the shift lever is in. The shift lever has seven positions. It must be in Park or Neutral to start the engine. When you are stopped in D , D , 2, 1, N or R, press firmly on the brake pedal, and keep your foot off the accelerator pedal. 218 Driving SHIFT LEVER Shift Lever Position Indicator The ‘‘D 4 ’’ indicator comes on for a few seconds when you turn the ignition switch ON (II). If it flashes while driving (in any shift position), it indicates a possible problem in the transmission. Avoid rapid acceler- ation and have the transmission checked by an authorized Acura dealer as soon as possible. 4 3 Automatic Transmission Park (P) To shift from: Do this: Park position. Reverse (R) ɻ To shift to Reverse P to R Press the brake pedal. from Park, see the explanation under N to R Push down on the shift lever. If you have done all of the above and Park. To shift to Reverse from 2 to 1 still cannot move the lever out of Neutral, come to a complete stop and 1 to 2 Park, see Shift Lock Release on page then shift. Push down on the shift 2 to D 3 221 . lever before shifting into Reverse D 3 toD 4 from Neutral. D 4 toN D 4 toD 3 Move the lever. Neutral (N) ɻ Use Neutral if you D 3 to2 need to restart a stalled engine, or if N to D 4 it is necessary to stop briefly with R to N the engine idling. Shift to Park posi- R to P tion if you need to leave the vehicle for any reason. Press on the brake pe- Whenever you move the shift lever, dal when you are moving the shift slide it along the guide on the lever from Neutral to another gear. console. ɻ This position mechani- cally locks the transmission. Use To avoid transmission damage, come Park whenever you are turning off or to a complete stop before shifting starting the engine. To shift out of into Park. The shift lever must be in Park, you must press on the brake Park before you can remove the key pedal and have your foot off the from the ignition switch. accelerator pedal. Move the shift lever to the right to shift out of the CONTINUED Driving 219 Automatic Transmission Drive (D 4 ) Engine Speed Limiter Drive (D 3 ) 220 Use this position for your normal driving. The transmis- sion automatically selects a suitable gear for your speed and acceleration. You may notice the transmission shifting up at higher speeds when the engine is cold. This helps the engine warm up faster. This position is similar to D , except only the first three gears are selected. Use D when towing a trailer in hilly terrain, or to provide engine braking when going down a steep hill. D can also keep the transmission from cycling between third and fourth gears in stop-and-go driving. For faster acceleration when in D or D , you can get the transmission to automatically downshift by pushing the accelerator pedal to the floor. The transmission will shift down one or two gears, depending on your speed. If you exceed the maximum speed for the gear you are in, the engine speed will enter into the tachometer’s red zone. If this occurs, you may feel the engine cut in and out. This is caused by a limiter in the engine’s computer controls. The engine will run normally when you reduce the RPM below the red zone. 4 3 3 3 4 3 4 Driving ɻ Second (2) ɻ This position locks the transmission in second gear. It does not downshift to first gear when you come to a stop. Second gives you more power when climbing, and increased engine braking when going down steep hills. Use second gear when starting out on a slippery surface or in deep snow. It will help ɻ reduce wheelspin. First (1) ɻ To shift from Second to First, push down on the shift lever. With the lever in this position, the transmission locks in First gear. By upshifting and downshifting through 1, 2, D and D , you can operate this transmission much like a manual transmission without a clutch pedal. Automatic Transmission Shift Lock Release This allows you to move the shift lever out of Park if the normal method of pushing on the brake pedal does not work. 1. Set the Parking brake. 2. Remove the key from the ignition switch. 3. Put a cloth on the edge of the Shift Lock Release slot cover next to SHIFT LOCK RELEASE SLOT the shift lever. Use a small flat- 4. Insert the key in the Shift Lock 6. Remove the key from the Shift tipped screwdriver or small metal Release slot. Lock Release slot, then reinstall plate (neither are included in the the cover. Make sure the notch on tool kit) to remove the cover. 5. Push down on the key and move the cover is on the right side. Carefully pry on the edge of the the shift lever out of Park to Depress the brake pedal and cover. Neutral. restart the engine. If you need to use the Shift Lock Release, it means your car is developing a problem. Have the vehicle checked by your Acura dealer. Driving 221 Parking Always use the parking brake when Parking Tips you park your car. The indicator on Make sure the moonroof and the the instrument panel shows that the windows are closed. parking brake is not fully released; it does not indicate that the parking Turn off the lights. brake is firmly set. Make sure the parking brake is set firmly or your Make sure the parking brake is fully Place any packages, valuables, etc., car may roll if it is parked on an released before driving away. in the trunk or take them with you. incline. Driving with the parking brake partially set can overheat or damage Lock the doors with the key or the Set the parking brake before you put the rear brakes. remote transmitter. Check the the transmission in Park. This keeps indicator on the driver’s door to the vehicle from moving and putting verify that the security system is pressure on the parking mechanism set. in the transmission making it easier to move the shift lever out of Never park over dry leaves, tall Park when you want to drive away. grass, or other flammable materials. The three way catalytic converter gets very hot, and could cause these materials to catch on fire. 222 Driving If the vehicle is facing uphill, turn the front wheels away from the curb. If the vehicle is facing downhill, turn the front wheels toward the curb. ɻ Your Acura is equipped with disc brakes at all four wheels. A power assist helps reduce the effort needed on the brake pedal. The ABS helps you retain steering control when braking very hard. Put your foot on the brake pedal only when you intend to brake. Resting your foot on the pedal keeps the brakes applied lightly, causing them to build up heat. Heat build-up can reduce how well your brakes work. It also keeps your brake lights on all the time, confusing drivers behind you. Constant application of the brakes when going down a long hill builds up heat and reduces their effective- ness. Use the engine to assist the brakes by downshifting to a lower gear and taking your foot off the accelerator pedal. Check your brakes after driving through deep water. Apply the brakes moderately to see if they feel normal. If not, apply them gently and frequently until they do. Since a longer distance is needed to stop with wet brakes, be extra cautious and alert in your driving. The Braking System Brake Wear Indicators All four brakes have audible brake wear indicators. When the brake pads need replacing, you will hear a distinctive metallic ‘‘screeching’’ sound when you apply the brakes. If you do not have the brake pads replaced, they will begin screeching all the time. Your brakes may sometimes squeal or squeak when you apply them lightly. Do not confuse this with the brake wear indicators. They make a very audible ‘‘screeching.’’ Driving 223 The Braking System Brake System Design Anti-lock Brakes You should never pump the The hydraulic system that operates Your car has an Anti-lock Brake brake pedal; this defeats the the brakes has two separate circuits. System (ABS) as standard purpose of the ABS. Let the ABS Each circuit works diagonally across equipment. ABS helps to prevent the work for you by always keeping firm, the vehicle (the left-front brake is wheels from locking up and skidding steady pressure on the brake pedal connected with the right-rear brake, during hard braking, allowing you to as you steer away from the hazard. etc.). If one circuit should develop a retain steering control. This is sometimes referred to as problem, you will still have braking at two wheels. When the front tires skid, you lose steering control; the vehicle You will feel a pulsation in the brake continues straight ahead even pedal when the ABS activates, and though you turn the steering wheel. you may hear some noise. This is The ABS helps to prevent lock-up normal; it is the ABS rapidly and helps you retain steering control pumping the brakes. by pumping the brakes rapidly; much faster than a person can do it. Activation varies with the amount of traction your tires have. On dry The ABS also balances the front-to pavement, you will need to press on rear braking distribution according the brake pedal very hard before you to vehicle loading. activate the ABS. However, you may feel the ABS activate immediately if you are trying to stop on snow or ice. Driving ‘‘stomp and steer.’’ Front 224 The Braking System Important Safety Reminders A vehicle with ABS may require a function of the braking system has ABS does not reduce the time or longer distance to stop on loose or shut down. The brakes still work like distance it takes to stop the uneven surfaces, such as gravel or a conventional system without anti- vehicle; it only helps with steering snow, than a vehicle without anti- lock, providing normal stopping control during braking. You should lock. Slow down and allow a greater ability. You should have the dealer always maintain a safe following distance between vehicles under inspect your car as soon as possible distance from other vehicles. those conditions. if this light stays on after you start the engine, or comes on while ABS will not prevent a skid that ABS Indicator driving. results from changing direction abruptly, ABS cannot prevent a loss of stability. 60 CONTINUED Driving 225 such as trying to take a ABS INDICATOR corner too fast or making a sudden lane change. Always drive at a safe, prudent speed for the road and weather conditions. Always steer moderately when you are braking hard. Severe or sharp steering wheel movement can still cause your car to veer into oncoming traffic or off the road. The ABS is self-checking. If anything goes wrong, the ABS indicator on the instrument panel comes on (see page ). This means the anti-lock The Braking System If the ABS indicator and the brake system indicator come on together, and the parking brake is fully released, the front-to-rear braking distribution system may also shut down. Test your brakes as instructed on page 325 . If the brakes feel normal, drive slowly and have your car repaired by your dealer as soon as possible. Avoid sudden hard braking which could cause the rear wheels to lock up and possibly lead to a loss of control. The VSA system indicator may come on along with the ABS indicator if there is a problem with the anti-lock brake system. 226 Driving Vehicle Stability Assist (VSA) System The Vehicle Stability Assist system The VSA system cannot enhance the VSA Activation Indicator helps to stabilize the vehicle during vehicle’s driving stability in all cornering if the vehicle turns more situations and does not control your or less than desired. It also assists car’s entire braking system. It is still you in maintaining traction while your responsibility to drive and accelerating on loose or slippery corner at reasonable speeds and to road surfaces. It does this by leave a sufficient margin of safety. regulating the engine’s output, and by selectively applying braking. When VSA activates, you may notice that the engine does not respond to the accelerator in the same way it does at other times. You will also see VSA ACTIVATION INDICATOR the VSA Activation Indicator blink. When VSA activates, you will see the VSA Activation indicator blink. CONTINUED Driving 227 Vehicle Stability Assist (VSA) System VSA System Indicator VSA Off Switch 228 If the VSA indicator comes on while driving, pull to the side of the road VSA SYSTEM INDICATOR when it is safe and turn off the engine. Reset the system by restarting the engine, and watch the VSA system indicator. If the indicator remains on, or comes back on while driving, have the VSA system inspected by your Acura dealer. If the indicator does not come on when the ignition switch is turned ON (II), there may be a problem The VSA system indicator (see page with the VSA system. Have your This switch is under the left vent. 60 ) comes on and stays on when dealer inspect your car as soon as Press it to turn the Vehicle Stability there is a problem with the VSA possible. Assist system on and off. system. Without VSA, your car will have When VSA is off, the VSA Activation normal braking and cornering ability, Indicator light comes on as a but it will not have VSA traction and reminder. Pressing the switch again stability enhancement. turns the system back on. Driving Vehicle Stability Assist (VSA) System VSA is turned on every time you VSA and Tire Sizes start the engine, even if you turned it Driving with varying tire or wheel off the last time you drove the sizes may cause the VSA to vehicle. malfunction. When replacing tires, make sure they are of the same size and type as your original tires (see page 283 ). Deactivate the VSA system if you need to drive with the compact spare tire installed (see page 308 ). If you install winter tires, make sure they are the same size as those that were originally supplied with your car. Exercise the same caution during winter driving as you would if your car was not equipped with VSA. Driving 229 Driving in Bad Weather 230 ɻ Exercise extra caution when driving in rain after a long dry spell. After months of dry weather, the first rains bring oil to the surface of the roadway, making it slippery. Rain, fog, and snow conditions require a different driving technique because of reduced traction and visibility. Keep your car well- maintained and exercise greater caution when you need to drive in bad weather. The cruise control should not be used in these conditions. Driving Technique Always drive slower than you would in dry weather. It takes your car longer to react, even in conditions that may seem just barely damp. Apply smooth, even pressure to all the controls. Abrupt steering wheel movements or sudden, hard appli- cation of the brakes can cause loss of control in wet weather. Be extra cautious for the first few miles (kilometers) of driving while you adjust to the change in driving conditions. This is especially true in snow. A person can forget some snow-driving techniques during the summer months. Practice is needed to relearn those skills. Driving Driving in Bad Weather Visibility ɻ Being able to see Traction ɻ Check your tires clearly in all directions and being frequently for wear and proper visible to other drivers are important pressure. Both are important in in all weather conditions. This is preventing ‘‘hydroplaning’’ (loss of more difficult in bad weather. To be traction on a wet surface). In the seen more clearly during daylight winter, mount snow tires on all four hours, turn on your headlights. wheels for the best handling. Inspect your windshield wipers and Watch road conditions carefully, washers frequently. Keep the wind- they can change from moment to shield washer reservoir full of the moment. Wet leaves can be as slip- proper fluid. Have the windshield pery as ice. ‘‘Clear’’ roads can have wiper blades replaced if they start to patches of ice. Driving conditions streak the windshield or leave parts can be very hazardous when the Be very cautious when passing, or unwiped. Use the defroster and air outside temperature is near freezing. being passed by other vehicles. The conditioning to keep the windows The road surface can become spray from large vehicles reduces from fogging up on the inside (see covered with areas of water puddles your visibility, and the wind buffeting pages 126 and 131 ). mixed with areas of ice, so your can cause you to lose control. traction can change without warning. Be careful when downshifting. If traction is low, you can lock up the drive wheels for a moment and cause a skid. Driving 231 Towing a Trailer Your Acura has been designed Load Limits primarily to carry passengers and their cargo. You can use it to tow a trailer if you carefully observe the load limits, use the proper equipment, and follow the guidelines in this section. Total Trailer Weight: The total Tongue Load: The weight that weight of the trailer and the tongue of a fully-loaded trailer everything loaded in it must not puts on the hitch should be exceed 2,000 lbs (900 kg). Towing approximately 10 percent of the a load that is too heavy can trailer weight. Too little tongue seriously affect your car’s load can make the trailer unstable handling and performance. It can and cause it to sway. Too much also damage the engine and tongue load reduces front-tire drivetrain. traction and steering control. 232 Driving Towing a Trailer To achieve a proper tongue load, Checking Loads start by loading 60 percent of the load toward the front of the trailer and 40 percent toward the rear, then re-adjust the load as needed. The total weight of the vehicle, all occupants, all cargo, and the tongue load must not exceed: Gross Axle Weight Rating (GAWR): The total weight of the vehicle, all occupants, all cargo, and the tongue load must not exceed: The best way to confirm that vehicle Exceeding load limits or and trailer weights are within limits improperly loading your car and is to have them checked at a public trailer can cause a crash in scale. which you can be seriously Gross Vehicle Weight Rating injured or killed. Using a suitable scale or a special (GVWR): tongue load gauge, check the tongue Check the loading of your car load the first time you set up a and trailer carefully before towing combination (a fully-loaded starting to drive. vehicle and trailer), then recheck the 4,830 lbs (2,190 kg) tongue load whenever the conditions change. 2,570 lbs (1,165 kg) on the front axle 2,260 lbs (1,025 kg) on the rear axle Driving 233 Towing a Trailer Towing Equipment and Hitches Trailer Brakes Accessories Safety Chains 234 Driving Any hitch used on your car must be Acura recommends that any trailer Towing can require a variety of properly bolted to the underbody. having a total weight of 1,000 lbs equipment, depending on the size of (450 kg) or more be equipped with your trailer, how it will be used, and its own electric or surge-type brakes. how much load you are towing. Always use safety chains. Make sure they are secured to both the trailer If you choose electric brakes, be Discuss your needs with your trailer and hitch, and that they cross under sure they are electronically actuated. sales or rental agency, and follow the the tongue so they can catch the Do not attempt to tap into your car’s guidelines in the rest of this section. trailer if it becomes unhitched. hydraulic system. No matter how Also make sure that all equipment is Leave enough slack to allow the successful it may seem, any attempt properly installed and that it meets trailer to turn corners easily, but do to attach trailer brakes to your car’s federal, state, province, and local not let the chains drag on the ground. hydraulic system will lower braking regulations. effectiveness and create a potential hazard. Towing a Trailer Trailer Lights Your car has a trailer lighting connector located in the trunk by the GROUND (BLACK) BACK-UP LIGHT (GREEN/BLACK) LEFT TURN SIGNAL (PINK/BLUE) left taillight. To use the connector, undo the fastener on the left side of the trunk lining. Refer to the drawing in this page for the wiring color code and purpose of each pin. If you use a converter, you can get the connector and pins that mate with the connector in your car from your Acura dealer. Since lighting and wiring vary in trailer type and brand, you should also have a qualified mechanic install a suitable connector between the vehicle and the trailer. RIGHT TURN SIGNAL BRAKE LIGHT TAILLIGHT (GREEN/YELLOW) (GREEN/WHITE) (RED/BLACK) CONTINUED Driving 235 Towing a Trailer Driving Additional Trailer Equipment Pre-Tow Checklist Your car tires and spare are Many states and Canadian provinces When preparing to tow, and before properly inflated (see page 280 ), require special outside mirrors when driving away, be sure to check the and the trailer tires and spare are towing a trailer. Even if they don’t, following: inflated as recommended by the you should install special mirrors if trailer maker. you cannot clearly see behind you, or The vehicle has been properly if the trailer creates a blind spot. serviced, and the tires, brakes, suspension, and cooling system Ask your trailer sales or rental are in good operating condition. agency if any other items are recommended or required for your All weights and loads are within towing situation. limits (see pages 232 and 233 ). The hitch, safety chains, and any other attachments are secure. All items on and in the trailer are properly secured and cannot shift while you drive. The lights and brakes on your car and the trailer are working properly. 236 Towing a Trailer Driving Safely With a Trailer Making Turns and Braking If you must stop when facing uphill, The added weight, length, and use the foot brake or parking brake. height of a trailer will affect your car’s Do not try to hold the vehicle in handling and performance, so place by pressing on the accelerator, driving with a trailer requires some as this can cause the automatic special driving skills and techniques. transmission to overheat. For your safety and the safety of others, take time to practice driving maneuvers before heading for the open road, and follow the guidelines Driving on Hills discussed below. Towing Speeds and Gears Drive slower than normal in all driving situations, and obey posted speed limits for vehicles with trailers. Use the D position when towing a trailer on level roads. D is the proper shift lever position to use when towing a trailer in hilly terrain. (See ‘‘ Driving on Hills ’’ in the next 3 column for additional gear information.) 237 Make turns more slowly and wider than normal. The trailer tracks a smaller arc than your car, and it can hit or run over something the vehicle misses. Allow more time and distance for braking. Do not brake or turn suddenly as this could cause the trailer to jackknife or turn over. When driving down hills, reduce your speed and shift down to 2nd gear. Do not ‘‘ride’’ the brakes, and remember it will take longer to slow When climbing hills, closely watch down and stop when towing a trailer. your temperature gauge. If it nears the red (Hot) mark, turn the air conditioning off, reduce speed and, if necessary, pull to the side of the road to let the engine cool. 4 3 If the automatic transmission shifts frequently between 3rd and 4th gears while going up a hill, shift to D . CONTINUED Driving Towing a Trailer Handling Crosswinds and Buffeting Backing Up Driving Parking Crosswinds and air turbulence Follow all normal precautions when caused by passing trucks can disrupt parking, including putting the your steering and cause trailer transmission in Park and firmly swaying. When being passed by a setting the parking brake. Also, place large vehicle, keep a constant speed wheel chocks at each of the trailer’s and steer straight ahead. Do not try tires. to make quick steering or braking corrections. Always drive slowly and have someone guide you when backing up. Grip the bottom of the steering wheel; then turn the wheel to the left to get the trailer to move to the left, and turn the wheel right to move the trailer to the right. 238 This section explains why it is important to keep your car well maintained and how to follow basic maintenance safety precautions. This section also includes Maintenance Schedules for normal driving and severe driving conditions, a Maintenance Record, and instruc- tions for simple maintenance tasks you may want to take care of yourself. If you have the skills and tools to per- form more complex maintenance tasks on your Acura, you may want to purchase the Service Manual. See page 355 for information on how to obtain a copy, or see your Acura dealer. ...................... Maintenance Safety . 240 . Important Safety Precautions . 241 ................. Maintenance Schedule . 242 ... Required Maintenance Record . 249 ....... Owner Maintenance Checks . 251 .............................. Fluid Locations . 252 ...................................... Engine Oil . 253 .................................. Adding Oil . 253 .................... Recommended Oil . 253 .............................. Synthetic Oil . 254 .................................... Additives . 254 ..... Changing the Oil and Filter . 255 ............................. Cooling System . 257 ............ Adding Engine Coolant . 257 ....... Replacing Engine Coolant . 259 .................... Windshield Washers . 263 .... Automatic Transmission Fluid . 264 .............................. Differential Oil . 265 .................................... Brake Fluid . 266 ............................ Brake System . 266 .............................. Power Steering . 266 .................................... Hood Latch . 267 ..................... Air Cleaner Element . 267 .................................... Spark Plugs . 269 .............................. Replacement . 269 ............................ Specifications . 272 Maintenance Battery ........................................... . 272 Wiper Blades ................................. . 275 Air Conditioning System .............. . 277 Dust and Pollen Filter .................. . 278 Drive Belts ..................................... . 278 Timing Belt .................................... . 279 Tires ............................................... . 279 Inflation ...................................... . 279 Inspection .................................. . 281 Maintenance .............................. . 282 Tire Rotation ............................. . 282 Replacing Tires and Wheels ... . 283 Wheels and Tires ...................... . 284 Winter Driving .......................... . 284 Snow Tires ............................. . 285 Tire Chains ............................ . 285 Lights ............................................. . 286 Replacing Bulbs ........................ . 288 Storing Your Car ........................... . 297 Maintenance 239 Maintenance Safety Regularly maintaining your car is the best way to protect your investment. Proper maintenance is essential to your safety and the safety of your passengers. It will also reward you with more economical, trouble-free driving, and help reduce air pollution. Improperly maintaining this vehicle or failing to correct a problem before driving can cause a crash in which you can be seriously hurt or killed. Always follow the inspection and maintenance recommendations and schedules in this owner’s manual. 240 Maintenance This section includes instructions for simple maintenance tasks, such as checking and adding oil. Any service items not detailed in this section should be performed by an Acura technician or other qualified mechanic. Some of the most important safety precautions are given here. However, we cannot warn you of every conceivable hazard that can arise in performing maintenance. Only you can decide whether or not you should perform a given task. Failure to properly follow maintenance instructions and precautions can cause you to be seriously hurt or killed. Always follow the procedures and precautions in this owner’s manual. Maintenance Safety Important Safety Precautions Read the instructions before you Before you begin any maintenance, begin, and make sure you have the make sure your car is parked on tools and skills required. level ground and that the parking brake is set. Also, be sure the engine To reduce the possibility of fire or is off. This will help to eliminate explosion, be careful when working several potential hazards: around gasoline or batteries. Use a commercially available degreaser or Carbon monoxide poisoning parts cleaner, not gasoline, to clean from engine exhaust. Be sure parts. Keep cigarettes, sparks, and there is adequate ventilation flames away from the battery and all whenever you operate the engine. fuel-related parts. Burns from hot parts. Let the You should wear eye protection and engine and exhaust system cool protective clothing when working before touching any parts. near the battery or when using compressed air. Injury from moving parts. Do not run the engine unless in- structed to do so. Maintenance 241 Maintenance Schedule The Maintenance Schedule specifies The services and time or distance Which Schedule to Follow: how often you should have your car intervals shown in the maintenance serviced and what things need schedule assume you will use your attention. It is essential that you have car as normal transportation for your car serviced as scheduled to passengers and their possessions. retain its high level of safety, You should also follow these dependability, and emissions control recommendations: U.S. Owners performance. Avoid exceeding your car’s load limit. This puts excess stress on the engine, brakes, and many other parts of your car. The load limit is shown on the label on the driver’s doorjamb. Operate your car on reasonable roads within the legal speed limit. Drive your car regularly over a distance of several miles (kilometers). Always use unleaded gasoline with the proper octane rating (see page ). 242 Maintenance Service your car according to the time and mileage periods on one of the Maintenance Schedules on the following pages. ɻ Follow the Maintenance Schedule for Severe Conditions if you drive your car MAINLY under one or more of the following conditions. Driving less than 5 miles (8 km) per trip or, in freezing temperatures, driving less than 10 miles (16 km) per trip. Driving in extremely hot [over 90°F (32°C)] conditions. Extensive idling or long periods of stop-and-go driving, such as a taxi or a commercial delivery vehicle. 204 Maintenance Schedule Trailer towing, driving with a roof Your authorized Acura dealer knows U.S. Cars: rack, or driving in mountainous your car best and can provide conditions. competent, efficient service. However, service at a dealer is not Driving on muddy, dusty, or mandatory to keep your warranties deiced roads. in effect. Maintenance may be done by any qualified service facility or person who is skilled in this type of automotive service. Keep all the receipts as proof of completion, and have the person who does the work fill out the Maintenance Record. Follow the Check your warranty booklet for Maintenance Schedule for Severe more information. Conditions. We recommend the use of Acura parts and fluids whenever you have maintenance done. These are manufactured to the same high- quality standards as the original components, so you can be confident of their performance and durability. Maintenance Maintenance, replacement, or repair of emissions control devices and systems may be done by any automotive repair establishment or individual using parts that are ‘‘certified’’ to EPA NOTE: If you only OCCASIONALLY standards. drive under a ‘‘severe’’ condition, you should follow the Maintenance According to state and federal Schedule for Normal Conditions. regulations, failure to perform maintenance on the items marked Canadian Owners ɻ with ˌ will not void your emissions warranties. However, Acura recommends that all maintenance services be performed at the recommended time or mileage period to ensure long-term reliability. 243 Service the items listed at the indicated distance (or time, if given). miles x 1,000 15 30 45 60 75 90 105 120 km x 1,000 24 48 72 96 120 144 168 192 Check engine oil and coolant Check oil and coolant at each fuel stop Check tires Check inflation and condition once a month Replace engine oil Every 7,500 miles (12,000 km) or every 1 year, whichever comes first Rotate tires (follow pattern on page 282 ) Every 7,500 miles (12,000 km) Replace engine oil filter Check front and rear brakes Check parking brake adjustment Inspect the following items: Tie-rod ends, steering gearbox, and boots Suspension components Driveshaft boots Brake hoses and lines (including ABS) All fluid levels and condition of fluids Exhaust system Fuel lines and connections Inspect and adjust drive belts Replace dust and pollen filter (Or every 2 years, whichever comes first) Replace air cleaner element Replace spark plugs Replace automatic transmission fluid Replace front differential fluid Inspect idle speed Replace timing belt, balancer belt, and inspect water pump (Or every 7 years, whichever comes first) Replace engine coolant Replace brake fluid 1: 2: : 243 (Or every 1 year, whichever comes first) ˌ ˌ ˎ ˎ At 120,000 miles (192,000 km) or 10 years, then every 60,000 miles (96,000 km) or 5 years See information on maintenance and emissions warranty, last column, page . Maintenance 1 2 Every 3 years (independent of mileage) ˎ Replace at 120,000 miles (192,000 km) or 6 years, then every 90,000 miles (144,000 km) or 5 years. ˎ ˌ Replace at 60,000 miles (96,000 km) or 4 years, then every 30,000 miles (48,000 km) or 2 years. 244 135 216 150 240 Service the items listed at the indicated distance (or time, if given). miles x 1,000 15 30 45 60 75 90 105 120 135 150 km x 1,000 24 48 72 96 120 144 168 192 216 240 Check engine oil and coolant Check oil and coolant at each fuel stop Check tires Check inflation and condition once a month Replace engine oil and oil filter Every 3,750 miles (6,000 km) or 6 months, whichever comes first Rotate tires (follow pattern on page 282 ) Every 7,500 miles (12,000 km) Check front and rear brakes Inspect the following items: Tie-rod ends, steering gearbox, and boots Every 7,500 miles (12,000 km) or 6 months, whichever comes first Suspension components Driveshaft boots Check parking brake adjustment Lubricate all hinges, locks and latches Inspect the following items: Brake hoses and lines (including ABS) All fluid levels and condition of fluids Exhaust system Fuel lines and connections Lights and controls/vehicle underbody Inspect and adjust drive belts Replace dust and pollen filter (Or every 2 years, whichever comes first) Clean air cleaner element Replace air cleaner element (Use normal schedule except in dusty condition) Replace spark plugs Replace automatic transmission fluid Replace front differential fluid Inspect idle speed Replace timing belt , balancer belt , and inspect water pump (Or every 7 years, whichever comes first) Replace engine coolant 120,000 miles (192,000 km) or 10 years, then every 60,000 miles (96,000 km) or 5 years Replace brake fluid Every 3 years (independent of mileage) See dust and pollen filter on page for replacement information under special driving conditions. See information on maintenance and emissions warranty, last column, page . (Or every 1 year, whichever comes first) ˌ ˌ ˎ 1 ˎ 2 ˎ 3 ˌ , 4 , ˎ 4 ˎ 1: 278 ˎ 2: Replace at 60,000 miles (96,000 km) or 3 years, then every 30,000 miles (48,000 km) or 2 years. ˎ 3: Replace at 30,000 miles (48,000 km) or 2 years, then every 15,000 miles (24,000 km) or 1 year. ˎ 4: See timing belt on page 279 for replacement information under special driving conditions. ˌ : 243 Maintenance 245 Required Maintenance Record (for Normal and Severe Schedules) You or the servicing dealer can record all completed maintenance here, whether you follow the schedule for normal conditions (page ) or severe conditions (page ). Keep the receipts for all work done on your car. 6,000 km 12,000 km 18,000 km 24,000 km (or 1 year) 30,000 km 36,000 km 42,000 km 48,000 km (or 2 years) Maintenance 244 245 3,750 mi 7,500 mi 11,250 mi 15,000 mi 18,750 mi 22,500 mi 26,250 mi 30,000 mi Signature or dealer stamp mi/km 33,750 mi Signature or dealer stamp mi/km 54,000 km Date Date mi/km 37,500 mi mi/km 60,000 km Date Date mi/km 41,250 mi mi/km 66,000 km Date Date mi/km 45,000 mi mi/km 72,000 km Date (or 3 years) Date mi/km 48,750 mi mi/km 78,000 km Date Date mi/km 52,500 mi mi/km 84,000 km Date Date mi/km 56,250 mi mi/km 90,000 km Date Date mi/km 60,000 mi mi/km 96,000 km Date (or 4 years) Date 246 63,750 mi 102,000 km 67,500 mi 108,000 km 71,250 mi 114,000 km 75,000 mi 120,000 km (or 5 years) 78,750 mi 126,000 km 82,500 mi 132,000 km 86,250 mi 138,000 km 90,000 mi 144,000 km (or 6 years) Required Maintenance Record (for Normal and Severe Schedules) Signature or dealer stamp mi/km 93,750 mi Signature or dealer stamp mi/km 150,000 km Date Date mi/km 97,500 mi mi/km 156,000 km Date Date mi/km 101,250 mi mi/km 162,000 km Date Date mi/km 105,000 mi mi/km 168,000 km Date (or 7 years) Date mi/km 108,750 mi mi/km 174,000 km Date Date mi/km 112,500 mi mi/km 180,000 km Date Date mi/km 116,250 mi mi/km 186,000 km Date Date mi/km 120,000 mi mi/km 192,000 km Date (or 8 years) Date CONTINUED Maintenance 247 Required Maintenance Record (for Normal and Severe Schedules) 123,750 mi Signature or dealer stamp mi/km 198,000 km Date 127,500 mi mi/km 204,000 km Date 131,250 mi mi/km 210,000 km Date 135,000 mi mi/km 216,000 km Date 138,750 mi mi/km 222,000 km Date 142,500 mi mi/km 228,000 km Date 146,250 mi mi/km 234,000 km Date 150,000 mi mi/km 240,000 km Date 248 Maintenance You should check the following items at the specified intervals. If you are unsure of how to perform any check, turn to the page given. Owner Maintenance Checks Engine oil level ɻ Check every Tires ɻ Check the tire pressure time you fill the fuel tank. See monthly. Examine the tread for page 207 . wear and foreign objects. See page . Engine coolant level ɻ Check the radiator reserve tank every time ɻ you fill the fuel tank. See page 208 . Windshield washer fluid ɻ Check the level in the reservoir monthly. If weather conditions cause you to use the washers frequently, check the reservoir each time you stop for fuel. See page 263 . Automatic transmission ɻ Check the fluid level monthly. See page 264 . Brakes ɻ Check the fluid level monthly. See page 266 . Maintenance 281 Lights Check the operation of the headlights, parking lights, taillights, high-mount brake light, turn signals, brake lights, and license plate lights monthly. See page 286 . 249 Fluid Locations Maintenance BRAKE AUTOMATIC TRANSMISSION (Gray cap) FLUID FLUID DIPSTICK (Yellow loop) ENGINE FILL CAP OIL ENGINE COOLANT RESERVOIR POWER STEERING FLUID (Red cap) WASHER FLUID (Blue cap) ENGINE OIL DIPSTICK RADIATOR CAP (Orange loop) 250 Engine Oil Adding Oil damage components in the engine Make sure the API Certification Seal compartment. says ‘‘For Gasoline Engines.’’ ENGINE OIL FILL CAP Recommended Oil Oil is major contributor to your engine’s performance and longevity. Always use a premium-grade detergent oil displaying the API Certification Seal. This seal indicates the oil is energy conserving, and that it meets the American Petroleum Institute’s latest requirements. It is highly recommended that you use Honda Motor Oil in your car for as To add oil, unscrew and remove the long as you own it. API CERTIFICATION SEAL engine oil fill cap on top of the left valve cover. Pour in the oil, and replace the engine oil fill cap. Tighten it securely. Wait a few minutes and recheck the oil level. Do not fill above the upper mark; you could damage the engine. Pour the oil slowly and carefully so you do not spill. Clean up any spills immediately. Spilled oil could CONTINUED Maintenance 251 Engine Oil The numbers on the container’s label Synthetic Oil Additives tell you the oil’s viscosity or weight. Select the oil for your car according to this chart. An oil with a viscosity of 5W-30 is preferred for optimum fuel economy and year-round protection in your Acura. You may use a 10W-30 oil if the temperature in your area never goes below 20°F ( 7°C). 252 Maintenance You may use a synthetic motor oil if Your Acura does not need any oil it meets the same requirements additives. Purchasing additives for given for conventional motor oil: it the engine or transmission will not displays the API Certification Seal, increase your car’s performance or and it is the proper weight as shown longevity. It only increases the cost on the chart. When using synthetic of operating your car. oil, you must follow the oil and filter change intervals given in the maintenance schedule. Ambient Temperature ɻ Always change the oil and filter according to the time and distance (miles/kilometers) recommenda- tions in the maintenance schedule. The oil and filter collect contami- nants that can damage your engine if they are not removed regularly. Changing the oil and filter requires special tools and access from underneath the vehicle. The vehicle should be raised on a service station- type hydraulic lift for this service. Run the engine until it reaches Unless you have the knowledge and normal operating temperature, proper equipment, you should have then shut it off. this maintenance done by a skilled mechanic. Open the hood and remove the engine oil fill cap. Remove the oil drain bolt and washer from the bottom of the engine. Drain the oil into an appropriate container. Changing the Oil and Filter 1. 2. OIL DRAIN BOLT WASHER Engine Oil OIL FILTER 3. Remove the oil filter and let the remaining oil drain. A special wrench (available from your Acura dealer) is required to remove the filter. CONTINUED Maintenance 253 Engine Oil 4. Install a new oil filter according to instructions that come with it. 5. Put a new washer on the drain bolt, then reinstall the drain bolt. Tighten it to: 33 lbf·ft (44 N·m , 4.5 kgf·m) 254 Maintenance 6. 7. Refill the engine with the recom- mended oil. Engine oil change capacity (including filter): 4.9 US qt (4.6 ) Replace the engine oil fill cap. Start the engine. The oil pressure indicator light should go out within five seconds. If it does not, turn off the engine and reinspect your work. 8. 9. Let the engine run for several minutes, then check the drain bolt and oil filter for leaks. Turn off the engine, let it sit for several minutes, then check the oil level. If necessary, add oil to bring the level to the upper mark on the dipstick. Improper disposal of engine oil can be harmf ul to the environment. If you change your own oil, please dispose of the used oil properly. Put it in a sealed container and take it to a recycling center. Do not discard it in a trash bin or dump it on the ground. Engine Oil Maintenance 255 Cooling System Maintenance If Always use Honda All Season the reserve tank is completely Antifreeze/Coolant Type 2. This empty, you should also check the coolant is pre-mixed with 50 percent coolant level in the radiator. antifreeze and 50 percent water. It does not require any additional mixing. If it is not available, you may use another major-brand non-silicate coolant as a temporary replacement. Make sure it is a high-quality coolant recommended for aluminum engines. However, continued use of any non- Honda coolant can result in corrosion, causing the cooling system to malfunction or fail. Have the cooling system flushed and Make sure the engine and radiator refilled with Honda antifreeze/ are cool. coolant as soon as possible. Adding Engine Coolant RESERVE TANK Removing the radiator cap while the engine is hot can cause the coolant to spray out, seriously scalding you. Always let the engine and radiator cool down before removing the radiator cap. If the coolant level in the reserve tank is at or below the MIN line, add coolant to bring it up to the MAX line. Inspect the cooling system for leaks. The coolant you add should always be a mixture of 50 percent antifreeze and 50 percent water. Never add straight antifreeze or plain water. 1. 256 2. 3. Cooling System 5. Put the radiator cap back on. Tighten it fully. RADIATOR CAP 6. Pour coolant into the reserve tank. Fill it to halfway between the MAX and MIN marks. Put the cap back on the reserve tank. Do not add any rust inhibitors or other additives to your car’s cooling system. They may not be compatible with the coolant or engine compo- RESERVE TANK nents. Turn the radiator cap counter- 4. The coolant level should be up to clockwise, without pressing down the base of the filler neck. Add on it, until it stops. This relieves coolant if it is low. any pressure remaining in the cooling system. Pour the coolant slowly and carefully so you do not spill. Clean up any Remove the radiator cap by spills immediately. Spilled coolant pushing down and turning could damage components in the counterclockwise. engine compartment. CONTINUED Maintenance 257 Cooling System Replacing Engine Coolant The cooling system should be completely drained and refilled with new coolant according to the time and distance recommendations in the maintenance schedule. Only use Honda All Season Antifreeze/ Coolant Type 2. Use of any non- Honda coolant or plain water can result in corrosion and deposits in the cooling system. Draining the coolant requires access to the underside of the vehicle. Unless you have the tools and knowledge, you should have this maintenance done by a skilled mechanic. 258 Maintenance 1. 2. Turn the ignition ON (II). Turn the heater temperature control dial to maximum heat (climate control to 90°F/32°C). Turn off the ignition. Open the hood. Make sure the engine and radiator are cool to the touch. Remove the radiator cap. 3. DRAIN PLUG Loosen the drain plug on the bottom of the radiator. The coolant will come out through the hole in the splash cover. Cooling System RESERVE TANK HOLDER 6. When the coolant stops draining, tighten the drain plug at the bottom of the radiator. Put the drain cap back in place CLIP tightly, then reinstall the clip on the drain cap securely. DRAIN CAP RESERVE TANK CAP 4. On the right side of the engine 5. Remove the reserve tank from its block, remove the clip with a plier, holder by pulling it straight up. and then remove the drain cap. Drain the coolant, then put the tank back in its holder. CONTINUED Maintenance 259 Cooling System Maintenance NUTS BLEEDER BOLT 9. Pour Honda All Season Antifreeze/Coolant Type 2 into the radiator up to the base of the filler neck. This coolant is a mixture of 50 percent antifreeze and 50 percent water. Pre-mixing is not required. The cooling system capacity is: 1.61 US gal (6.1 ) 10. Tighten the bleeder bolt when BOLTS coolant comes out in a steady stream with no bubbles. 7. Remove the two bolts and the 8. Loosen the bleeder bolt on top of three nuts with a 7/16 in (10 mm) the engine. wrench, then remove the engine cover. 260 Cooling System 13. Install the engine cover. First 16. Remove the radiator cap. Pour tighten the two bolts on the front coolant into the radiator up to the of the engine cover, then tighten base of the filler neck and into the the three nuts on the engine cover. reserve tank up to the MAX mark. Tightening torque: 7 lbf·ft (9.8 N·m , 1.0 kgf·m) 17. Start the engine and hold it at 1,500 rpm until the cooling fan 14. Install the radiator cap, and comes on. Turn off the engine. tighten it to the first stop. Check the coolant level in the radiator and add coolant if needed. 15. Start the engine and let it run until Fill up to here FILLER NECK the radiator cooling fan comes on at least twice. Then stop the 11. Fill the reserve tank to the MAX engine. mark. Install the reserve tank cap. 12. Check the level in the radiator, add coolant if needed. CONTINUED Maintenance 261 Cooling System Maintenance RESERVE TANK Install 18. the radiator cap, and tighten it fully. 19. If necessary, fill the reserve tank to the MAX mark. Install the reserve tank cap. 262 Windshield Washers Check the level in the windshield Fill the reservoir with a good-quality washer reservoir at least monthly windshield washer fluid. This during normal usage. In bad weather, increases the cleaning capability and when you use the washers often, prevents freezing in cold weather. check the level every time you stop for fuel. The windshield washer reservoir is Do not use engine antif reeze or a located behind the driver’s side vinegar/water solution in the headlight. windshield washer reservoir. FLOAT Antif reeze can damage your car’s paint, while a vinegar/water solution can Check the reservoir’s fluid level by damage the windshield washer pump. removing the cap and looking at the float. It should be up to the top of the Use only commercially-available neck. If the float is at the bottom of windshield washer f luid. the neck, the reservoir is nearly empty. When you refill the reservoir, clean the edges of the windshield wiper blades with windshield washer fluid on a clean cloth. This will help to condition the blade edges. Maintenance 263 Automatic Transmission Fluid Maintenance DIPSTICK DIPSTICK GUIDE Check the fluid level with the engine 3. at normal operating temperature. 1. Park the vehicle on level ground. Shut off the engine. 2. Remove the dipstick (yellow loop) 4. from the transmission, and wipe it with a clean cloth. 264 Insert the dipstick into the transmission. Make sure the notch in the rubber cap fits in the dipstick guide and that you push the dipstick in all the way. Remove the dipstick and check the fluid level. It should be between the upper and lower marks. UPPER MARK LOWER MARK 5. If the level is below the lower mark, add fluid into the tube to bring it to the upper mark. Always use Honda ATF-Z1 (Automatic Transmission Fluid). If it is not available, you may use a DEXRON III automatic transmission fluid as a temporary replacement. However, continued use can affect shift quality. Have the transmission flushed and refilled with Honda ATF-Z1 as soon as it is convenient. To thoroughly flush the transmission, the technician should drain and refill it with Honda ATF-Z1 (Automatic Transmission Fluid), then drive the vehicle a short distance. Do this three times. Then drain and refill the transmission a final time. Automatic Transmission Fluid, Differential Oil 6. Insert the dipstick back in the Dif f erential Oil Use a SAE 90 or SAE 80W-90 transmission. Make sure the notch fits in the dipstick guide and the DRAIN PLUG FILLER PLUG viscosity hypoid gear oil, API service classified GL4 or GL5 only, in the dipstick is down all the way. differential. The transmission should be drained and refilled with new fluid according to the time and distance recommen- dations in the maintenance schedule. Correct level The differential oil should be drained and refilled with new oil according to the time and distance recommenda- tions in the maintenance schedule. Check the oil in the differential with the vehicle sitting level. Remove the oil filler plug and check that the oil level is up to the edge of the hole. Maintenance 265 Viscosity If it is not, slowly add oil until it starts to run out of the hole. Reinstall the filler plug and tighten it securely. SAE 90: above 0°F ( ɻ 18°C) SAE 80W-90: below 0°F ( ɻ 18°C) Brake Fluid, Power Steering 266 Brake Fluid Brake System Power Steering Check the fluid level in the brake fluid reservoir monthly. The brake fluid should be replaced according to the time recommenda- tion in the maintenance schedule. Always use Honda Heavy Duty Brake Fluid DOT 3. If it is not available, you should use only DOT 3 or DOT 4 fluid, from a sealed container, as a temporary replacement. However, the use of any non-Honda brake fluid can cause corrosion and decrease the life of the system. Have the brake system flushed and refilled with Honda Heavy Duty Brake Fluid DOT 3 as soon as possible. Brake fluid marked DOT 5 is not compatible with your car’s braking system and can cause extensive damage. Maintenance UPPER LEVEL LOWER LEVEL MAX MIN You The fluid level should be between should check the fluid level in the MIN and MAX marks on the side the power steering reservoir at least of the reservoir. If the level is at or once a year. Check the level when below the MIN mark, your brake the engine is cold. Look at the side system needs attention. Have the of the reservoir. The fluid should be brake system inspected for leaks or between the UPPER LEVEL and worn brake pads. LOWER LEVEL. If it is below the LOWER LEVEL, add power steering fluid to the UPPER LEVEL. Power Steering, Hood Latch, Air Cleaner Element Always use Honda Power Steering Hood Latch Air Cleaner Element Fluid. If it is not available, you may The air cleaner element should be use another power steering fluid as cleaned or replaced according to the an emergency replacement. time and distance recommendations However, continued use can cause in the maintenance schedule. increased wear and poor steering in cold weather. Have the power PIVOTS Cleaning (Severe Conditions) steering system flushed and refilled Clean the air cleaner element by with Honda PSF as soon as possible. blowing compressed air through it in the opposite direction to normal air A low power steering fluid level can flow. If you do not have access to indicate a leak in the system. Check the fluid level frequently, and have the system inspected as soon as LATCH ASSEMBLY compressed air (such as a service station), ask your Acura dealer to do this service. possible. Clean the hood latch assembly with a mild cleaner, then lubricate it with a Follow the replacement procedure multipurpose grease. Lubricate all for removal and reinstallation. the moving parts (as shown), Turning the steering wheel to f ull lef t including the pivot. Follow the time or right lock and holding it there can and distance recommendations in damage the power steering pump. the Maintenance Schedule. If you are not sure how to clean and grease the latch, contact your Acura dealer. CONTINUED Maintenance 267 Air Cleaner Element Maintenance 5. 6. Place the new air cleaner element in the air cleaner housing. Reinstall the air cleaner housing cover, snap the four hold-down clamps back into place. Remove the old air cleaner element. Replacement 268 CLAMPS AIR CLEANER ELEMENT Remove The air cleaner element is inside the 2. the air cleaner housing air cleaner housing on the passenger’s cover. Do not disconnect the air side of the engine compartment. intake tube from the air cleaner housing cover. To replace it: 3. 1. Unsnap the four clamps holding the air cleaner housing cover. 4. Carefully clean the inside of the air cleaner housing with a damp rag. Spark Plugs The spark plugs in your car are a Replacement special platinum-tipped design for longer life. The spark plugs should NUTS NUTS BOLTS be replaced according to the time NUTS and distance recommendations in the maintenance schedule. BOLTS 1. Remove the two bolts and the 2. Remove the two bolts and the four three nuts with a 7/16 inch (10 nuts with a wrench and remove mm) wrench, then remove the the tower bar. Then remove the engine cover. A/C tube from the three clips. 3. Clean off any dirt and oil that have collected around the ignition coils. CONTINUED Maintenance 269 Spark Plugs IGNITION COIL CONNECTOR LOCK TAB 4. Disconnect the wire connector 5. from the ignition coil by pushing on the lock tab and pulling on the connector. Pull on the plastic connector, not the wires. 6. 270 Maintenance Use a wrench to remove the two bolts holding the ignition coil. Remove the ignition coil by pulling it straight out. Remove the spark plug with a five-eighths inch (16 mm) spark plug socket. BOLTS IGNITION COIL 7. Put the new spark plug into the socket, then screw it into the hole. Screw it in by hand so you do not crossthread it. Spark Plugs 12. Put the A/C tube back in place. Tighten the spark plugs caref ully. A 13. Install the tower bar and tighten spark plug that is too loose can the two bolts and the four nuts. overheat and damage the engine. Tightening torque: Overtightening can cause damage to 16 lbf·ft (22 N·m , 2.2 kgf·m) the threads in the cylinder head. 14. Install the engine cover. First 9. Install the ignition coil. Reinstall tighten the two bolts on the front the two hold-down bolts. of the engine cover, then tighten the three nuts on the engine cover. 10. Push the wire connector onto the Tightening torque: ignition coil. Make sure it locks in 7 lbf·ft (9.8 N·m , 1.0 kgf·m) place. 8. Torque the spark plug. (If you do not have a torque wrench, tighten 11. Repeat this procedure for the the spark plug two-thirds of a turn other five spark plugs. after it contacts the cylinder head.) Tightening torque: 13 lbf·ft (18 N·m , 1.8 kgf·m) CONTINUED Maintenance 271 Spark Plugs, Battery Specifications: Battery Check the condition of your car’s NGK: PFR5L-11 battery monthly. You should check DENSO: PK16PR-L11 the color of the test indicator window, and for corrosion on the terminals. Spark Plug Gap: 0.04 in (1.1 mm) ɹ ɻ 0 0.1 mm Check the battery condition by looking at the test indicator window on the battery. The label on the battery explains the test indicator’s colors. Maintenance TEST INDICATOR WINDOW 272 Battery Check the battery terminals for If you need to connect the battery to corrosion (a white or yellowish a charger, disconnect both cables to powder). To remove it, cover the prevent damage to the vehicle’s terminals with a solution of baking electrical system. soda and water. It will bubble up and turn brown. When this stops, wash it off with plain water. Dry off the battery with a cloth or paper towel. The battery gives off explosive Coat the terminals with grease to hydrogen gas during normal help prevent future corrosion. operation. WARNING: Battery posts, A spark or flame can cause the terminals, and related accessories battery to explode with enough contain lead and lead compounds. If the terminals are severely cor- force to kill or seriously hurt you. Wash hands after handling. roded, clean them with baking soda and water. Then use a wrench to Wear protective clothing and a loosen and remove the cables from face shield, or have a skilled the terminals. Always disconnect the mechanic do the battery negative ( ɻ ) cable first and recon- maintenance. nect it last. Clean the battery termi- nals with a terminal cleaning tool or wire brush. Reconnect and tighten the cables, then coat the terminals with grease. CONTINUED Maintenance 273 Battery If your car’s battery is disconnected or goes dead, the engine’s computer needs to ‘‘relearn’’ the idle control. After replacing or recharging the battery: 1. Make sure the climate control sys- tem is off. 2. Start the engine and let it run until it warms up (the radiator cooling fan comes on at least twice), and let it idle for five more minutes. 274 Maintenance If Your driver’s power window (see your car’s battery is disconnected page 103 ) and your audio system or goes dead, all stored driving will also disable itself when the bat- positions will be lost. To store the tery is disconnected or goes dead. driving positions again, see the The next time you turn on the radio storing procedure on page 98 . you will see ‘‘ ’’ in the frequency display. Use the Preset buttons to en- On cars with Navigation System ter the five-digit code (see page 180 ). The Navigation System will also disable itself. The next time you turn on the ignition switch, the system will require you to enter a PIN Charging the battery with the cables before it can be used. Refer to the connected can seriously damage your Navigation System Owner’s Manual. car’s electronic controls. Detach the battery cables bef ore connecting the battery to a charger. Wiper Blades Check the condition of the wiper blades at least every six months. WIPER ARMS Look for signs of cracking in the Maintenance 275 LOCK TAB rubber, or areas that are getting hard. Replace the blades if you find these signs, or if they leave streaks and unwiped areas when used. To replace the blade: Turn the ignition ON (II), switch the wipers to INT or (low position), then turn the ignition OFF when the wiper arm is approximately midway in its travel. 2. Disconnect the blade assembly from the wiper arm by pushing in 1. the lock tab. Hold the lock tab in ɻ while you push the blade assembly toward the base of the arm. CONTINUED Wiper Blades BLADE BLADE 5. Slide the new wiper blade into the holder until the tabs lock. 6. Slide the wiper blade assembly onto the wiper arm. Make sure it locks in place. 7. Turn the ignition switch ON (II) and return the windshield wipers to their park position. REINFORCEMENT 3. Remove the blade from its holder 4. Examine the new wiper blades. If by grasping the tabbed end of the they have no plastic or metal rein- blade. Pull firmly until the tabs forcement along the back edge, come out of the holder. remove the metal reinforcement strips from the old wiper blade and install them in the slots along the edge of the new blade. 276 Maintenance Air Conditioning System Your car’s air conditioning is a sealed If the air conditioning does not get as system. Any major maintenance, cold as before, have your dealer such as recharging, should be done check the system. Recharge the by a qualified mechanic. You can do system with Refrigerant HFC-134a a couple of things to make sure the (R-134a). (See Specifications on page air conditioning works efficiently. 338 .) Periodically check the engine’s radiator and air conditioning condenser for leaves, insects, and Whenever you have the air conditioning dirt stuck to the front surface. These system serviced, make sure the service block the air flow and reduce cooling efficiency. Use a light spray from a AIR CONDITIONING CONDENSER f acility uses a ref rigerant recycling system. This system captures the hose or a soft brush to remove them. Run the air conditioning at least once ref rigerant f or reuse. Releasing a week during the cold weather ref rigerant into the atmosphere can months. Run it for at least ten damage the environment. minutes while you are driving at a The condenser and radiator f ins bend steady speed with the engine at easily. Only use a low-pressure spray normal operating temperature. This or sof t-bristle brush to clean them. circulates the lubricating oil con- tained in the refrigerant. Maintenance 277 Dust and Pollen Filter, Drive Belts Dust and Pollen Filter Drive Belts The belts should have the following The dust and pollen filter removes ‘‘play’’ or deflection. pollen and dust that is brought in from the outside through the climate Alternator belt: control system. This filter should be replaced every 30,000 miles (48,000 km) under nor- mal conditions. It should be replaced every 15,000 miles (24,000 km) if you drive primarily in urban areas that have high concentrations of soot in the air from industry and diesel-pow- ered vehicles. Replace it more often if air flow from the climate control Check the condition of the three system becomes less than usual. drive belts. Examine the edges of Have dust and pollen filter replaced each belt for cracks or fraying. by your Acura dealer. Check the tension of each belt by pushing on it with your thumb midway between the pulleys. 278 Maintenance ALTERNATOR BELT COMPRESSOR BELT 0.37 ɻ 0.45 in (9.5 ɻ 11.5 mm) Compressor belt: 0.31 ɻ 0.43 in (8.0 ɻ 11.0 mm) Power steering belt: POWER STEERING 0.41 ɻ 0.49 in (10.5 ɻ 12.5 mm) BELT If you see signs of wear or looseness, have your dealer adjust or replace the belts. The timing belt and balancer belt should normally be replaced at the intervals shown in the maintenance schedule. Replace these belts at 60,000 miles (U.S.) or 100,000 km (Canada) if you regularly drive your car in one or more of these conditions: In very high temperatures (over 110°F, 43°C). In very low temperatures (under ɻ 20°F, ɻ 29°C). Timing Belt, Tires Maintenance Inflation Tires Timing Belt To safely operate your car, your tires must be the proper type and size, in good condition with adequate tread, and correctly inflated. The following pages give more detailed information on how and when to check air pressure, how to inspect your tires for damage and wear, and what to do when your tires need to be replaced. Keeping the tires properly inflated provides the best combination of handling, tread life, and riding comfort. Underinflated tires wear unevenly, adversely affect handling and fuel economy, and are more likely to fail from being overheated. Overinflated tires can make your car ride more harshly, are more prone to damage from road hazards, and wear unevenly. Using tires that are excessively We recommend that you visually worn or improperly inflated can check your tires every day. If you cause a crash in which you can think a tire might be low, check it be seriously hurt or killed. immediately with a tire gauge. Follow all instructions in this owner’s manual regarding tire inflation and maintenance. CONTINUED 279 Tires Use a gauge to measure the air If you check the pressure when the pressure at least once a month. Even tires are hot [the vehicle has been tires that are in good condition may driven several miles (kilometers)], lose one to two psi (10 to 20 kPa, 0.1 you will see readings 4 to 6 psi (30 to to 0.2 kgf/cm ) per month. 40 kPa, 0.3 to 0.4 kgf/cm ) higher Remember to check the spare tire at than the cold reading. This is normal. the same time you check all the Do not let air out to match the other tires. specified cold pressure. The tire will be underinflated. Check the pressure in the tires when they are cold. This means the vehicle has been parked for at least three hours. If you have to drive the vehicle before checking the tire pressure, the tires can still be considered ‘‘cold’’ if you drive less than 1 mile (1.6 km). Add or release air, if needed, to match the recommended cold tire pressures on this page. Maintenance You should get your own tire pressure gauge and use it whenever you check your tire pressures. This will make it easier for you to tell if a pressure loss is due to a tire problem and not due to a variation between gauges. 280 The following chart shows the recommended cold tire pressures for most normal driving conditions and speeds. Tire pressures for high speed driving are the same as for normal driving. Tire Size Cold Tire Pressure for Normal Driving Front/Rear: P225/55R16 94V 30 psi (210 kPa , 2.1 kgf/cm ) The compact spare tire pressure is: Recommended Tire Pressures for Normal Driving 60 psi (420 kPa , 4.2 kgf/cm ) For convenience, the recommended tire sizes and cold air pressures are on a label on the driver’s doorjamb. For additional technical information about your tires, see page .340 Tubeless tires have some ability to self-seal if they are punctured. However, because leakage is often very slow, you should look closely for punctures if a tire starts losing pressure. Tires Inspection Every time you check inflation, you INDICATOR LOCATION MARKS should also examine the tires for damage, foreign objects, and wear. You should look for: Bumps or bulges in the tread or side of the tire. Replace the tire if you find either of these conditions. Cuts, splits, or cracks in the side of the tire. Replace the tire if you TREAD WEAR INDICATORS can see fabric or cord. Your car’s tires have wear indicators molded into the tread. When the Excessive tread wear. tread wears down to that point, you will see a 1/2 inch (12.7 mm) wide band running across the tread. This shows there is less than 1/16 inch (1.6 mm) of tread left on the tire. A tire that is this worn gives very little traction on wet roads. You should replace the tire if you can see the tread wear indicator in three or more places around the tire. Maintenance 281 Tires Maintenance Make sure the installer balances the Tire Rotation In addition to proper inflation, wheels when you have new tires correct wheel alignment helps to installed. This increases riding Front Front decrease tire wear. If you find a tire comfort and tire life. Your car’s is worn unevenly, have your dealer original tires were dynamic or ‘‘spin’’ check the wheel alignment. balanced at the factory. For best results, have the installer perform a The tires were properly balanced by dynamic balance. the factory. They may need to be rebalanced at some time before they are worn out. Have your dealer check the tires if you feel a consis- tent vibration while driving. A tire should always be rebalanced if it is Maintenance Improper wheel weights can damage your car’s aluminum wheels. Use only genuine Acura wheel weights f or (For Non-directional (For Directional Tires and Wheels) Tires and Wheels) removed from the wheel for repair. balancing. To help increase tire life and distribute wear more evenly, you should have the tires rotated every 7,500 miles (12,000 km). Move the tires to the positions shown in the chart each time they are rotated. 282 Tires When shopping for replacement Replacing Tires and Wheels tires, you may find that some tires The tires that came with your car are ‘‘directional.’’ This means they were selected to match the perform- Installing improper tires on your are designed to rotate only in one ance capabilities of the vehicle while car can affect handling and direction. If you use directional tires, providing the best combination of stability. This can cause a crash they should be rotated only front-to- handling, ride comfort, and long life. in which you can be seriously back. You should replace them with radial hurt or killed. tires of the same size, load range, speed rating, and maximum cold tire Always use the size and type of pressure rating (as shown on the tires recommended in this tire’s sidewall). Mixing radial and owner’s manual. bias-ply tires on your car can reduce its braking ability, traction, and steering accuracy. It is best to replace all four tires at the same time. If that is not possible or necessary, then replace the two front tires or the two rear tires as a pair. Replacing just one tire can seriously affect your car’s handling. CONTINUED Maintenance 283 Tires The ABS and VSA system work by comparing the speed of the wheels. When replacing tires, use the same size originally supplied with the vehicle. Tire size and construction can affect wheel speed and may cause the system to work inconsistently. If you ever need to replace a wheel, make sure you use an identical style aluminum alloy wheel that originally came on your Acura. Replacement wheels are available at your Acura dealer. 284 Maintenance Wheels: Tires: See page for information about DOT Tire Quality Grading. Winter Driving Wheels and Tires 16 x 7 JJ P225/55R16 94V 340 ɹ Tires that are marked ‘‘M S’’ or ‘‘All Season’’ on the sidewall have an all-weather tread design. They should be suitable for most winter driving conditions. Tires without these markings are designed for optimum traction in dry conditions. They may not provide adequate performance in winter driving. For the best performance in snowy or icy conditions, you should install snow tires or tire chains. They may be required by local laws under certain conditions. If you mount snow tires on your Acura, make sure they are radial tires of the same size and load range as the original tires. Mount snow tires on all four wheels to balance your car’s handling in all weather conditions. Keep in mind the traction provided by snow tires on dry roads may not be as high as your car’s original equipment tires. You should drive cautiously even when the roads are clear. Check with the tire dealer for maximum speed recommen- dations. Snow Tires Tire Chains Because your Acura has limited tire clearance, mount only SAE Class ‘‘S’’ cable-type traction devices on the front tires. Use traction devices only when required by driving conditions or local laws. Make sure they are the correct size for your tires. Metal link-type ‘‘chains’’ should not be used. No matter how tight they seem to be installed, they can come into contact with the body and suspension, causing serious damage. Tires When installing cables, follow the manufacturer’s instructions and mount them as tightly as you can. Drive slowly with them installed. If you hear them coming in contact with the body or chassis, stop and investigate. Make sure the cables are installed tightly, and that they are not contacting the brake lines or suspension. Remove them as soon as you begin driving on cleared roads. Traction devices that are the wrong size or improperly installed can damage your car’s brake lines, suspension, body, and wheels. Stop driving if they are hitting any part of the vehicle. Maintenance 285 Lights Check the operation of your car’s exterior lights at least once a month. A burned out bulb can create an unsafe condition by reducing your car’s visibility and the ability to signal your intentions to other drivers. 286 Maintenance HIGH BEAM HEADLIGHT LOW BEAM HEADLIGHT FRONT FOG LIGHT TURN SIGNAL/ SIDE MARKER LIGHT PARKING LIGHT HIGH-MOUNT BRAKE LIGHT TURN SIGNAL LIGHT LICENSE PLATE LIGHTS BACK-UP LIGHT BRAKE/TAILLIGHTS Lights Check the following: Headlights (low and high beam) Fog lights Parking lights Taillights Brake lights Turn signals Back-up lights Hazard light function License plate lights Side marker lights High-mount brake light Daytime running lights (Canadian models) If you find any bulbs are burned out, replace them as soon as possible. Refer to the chart on page 339 to determine what type of replacement bulb is needed. Maintenance 287 Lights Headlight Aiming The headlights were properly aimed when your car was new. If you regularly carry heavy items in the trunk or pull a trailer, readjustment may be required. Adjustment of the headlights should be performed by an Acura technician or other qualified mechanic. Replacing a High Beam Headlight Bulb The low beam headlight bulbs are a type of high voltage discharge tube. High voltage can remain in the circuit even with the light switch off and the key removed. Because of this, you should not attempt to examine or change a low beam headlight bulb yourself. If a low beam headlight bulb fails, take the vehicle to your dealer to have it replaced. 288 Maintenance Halogen bulbs are used for the high beam headlight bulbs. When replacing a high beam headlight bulb, handle it by its base and protect the glass from contact with your skin or hard objects. If you touch the glass, clean it with denatured alcohol and a clean cloth. Halogen bulbs get very hot when lit. Oil, perspiration, or a scratch on the glass can cause the bulb to overheat and shatter. 1. 2. 3. Open the hood. Remove the electrical connector from the bulb by pulling the connector straight back. Remove the rubber weather seal by pulling on the tab. Lights WEATHER SEAL BULB 6. Install the rubber seal over the Replacing a Fog Light Bulb back of the headlight assembly. Your car uses halogen fog light Make sure it is right side up; it is bulbs. See page 288 for information marked ‘‘ ɣ .’’ on replacing a halogen bulb. 7. Push the electrical connector onto the new bulb. Turn on the headlights to test the new bulb. CONNECTOR HOLD-DOWN WIRE 4. Unclip the end of the hold-down wire from its slot. Pivot it out of the way and remove the bulb. 5. Insert the new bulb into the hole, making sure the bulb is right side up and the nubs on the bulb base fit in the indentations in the headlight assembly. Pivot the hold- down wire back in place and clip the end into the slot. CONTINUED Maintenance 289 Lights Maintenance Insert the new bulb into the hole, making sure the bulb is right side up and the nubs on the bulb base fit in the indentations in the fog light assembly. Pivot the hold- down wire back in place and clip the end into the slot. 1. 2. 3. 6. HOLD-DOWN WIRE WEATHER SEAL 7. BULB 8. 9. Install the rubber seal over the CONNECTOR back of the fog light assembly. Make sure it is right side up; it is BOLT marked ‘‘ .’’ Use a wrench to loosen the light assembly’s mounting bolt. Remove the light assembly from the bumper. Remove the electrical connector from the bulb by pulling the connector straight back. ɣ 4. Remove the rubber weather seal Push the electrical connector onto by pulling on the tab. the new bulb. Turn on the front fog lights to test the new bulb. 5. Unclip the end of the hold-down wire from its slot. Pivot the wire Put the light assembly into the out of the way and remove the bumper. Tighten the mounting bulb. bolt. 290 Lights Replacing Front Turn Signal/ 5. To remove the front turn signal/ Parking and Side Marker Light parking light bulb, push it in Bulbs slightly and turn it counterclockwise. To remove the HOLDING CLIP side marker bulb, pull it straight out of its socket. 6. Install the new bulb into the socket. 7. Insert the socket back into the headlight assembly. Turn it clockwise to lock it in place. 8. Test the lights to make sure the new bulb is working. 1. If you are changing the bulb on 2. Use a flat-tipped screwdriver to the driver’s side, start the engine, remove the holding clip from the 9. turn the steering wheel all the way inner fender. to the right, and turn off the engine. If you are changing the 3. bulb on the passenger’s side, turn the steering wheel to the left. 4. Remove the socket from the headlight assembly by turning it one-quarter turn counterclockwise. Maintenance 291 Put the inner fender cover in place. Install the holding clip. Lock it in place by pushing on the center. Pull the inner fender cover back. Lights Replacing Rear Bulbs 4. Pull the bulb straight out of its socket. Push the new bulb straight into the socket until it bottoms. 5. Reinstall the socket into the light assembly by turning it clockwise until it locks. 6. Test the lights to make sure the new bulb is working. 7. Undo the fastener on the side of the trunk lining by pushing on the center of the fastener’s head until it pops in. Pull the lining back. Remove the socket by turning it one-quarter turn counterclockwise. Maintenance FASTENER Reinstall the trunk lining. Make sure it is installed under the edge 1. Open the trunk. 2. Determine which of the four bulbs of the trunk seal. is burned out: brake/taillights, back-up light, or turn signal. 3. 292 8. 9. Reset the fastener by pushing on the pointed end until it pops back almost flush with the fingers on the housing. Put the fastener in the hole in the side of the trunk lining and push on the center until it locks (the center is flush with the head). Lights Replacing a High-mount Brake 3. Reinstall the socket. Turn it Light Bulb clockwise until it locks. 4. Test the lights to make sure the new bulb is working. 1. 2. Install the new bulb in the socket. Maintenance Open the trunk and remove the socket from the light assembly by turning it one-quarter turn counter- clockwise. Remove the bulb by pushing it in slightly and turning it counter- clockwise. 293 Lights Replacing a Rear License Plate Bulb Maintenance 3. 4. 5. 6. Pull the bulb straight out of its socket. Push the new bulb in until it bottoms in the socket. LIGHT ASSEMBLY BULB HOLDER BULB Turn on the parking lights and check that the new bulb is working. Put the lens back on the bulb holder and push it until it latches. Slide the right side of the light assembly into the hole. Push on LENS the left side to latch the assembly into place. 1. Remove the license light assembly 2. Remove the lens from the bulb by carefully prying on the left holder by pulling the lens while edge of the lens with a flat-tip squeezing the tabs on both sides screwdriver and pulling the of the holder. assembly out. 294 Lights Replacing Bulbs in the Interior Courtesy Lights DOOR LIGHT FRONT REAR The courtesy lights in the doors and Door light: Rear ceiling light: roof come apart the same way. They Pry on the top middle of the lens. Pry on the rear edge of the lens do not use the same type of bulb. in the middle. Remove the bulb Front ceiling light: cover by pulling it straight down. 1. Remove the lens by carefully Pry on the front edge of the lens prying on the edge of the lens with in the middle. Vanity mirror light: a fingernail file or a small flat-tip Pry on the top middle of the lens. screwdriver. Do not pry on the edge of the housing around the lens. CONTINUED Maintenance 295 Lights 296 Remove the bulb by pulling it straight out of its metal tabs. Push the new bulb into the metal tabs. Snap the lens back in place. Push the new bulb into the metal tabs. Snap the lens back in place. 2. 3. 2. 3. Replacing the Trunk Light Bulb Maintenance TRUNK VANITY MIRROR LIGHT 1. Remove the lens by carefully Remove the bulb by pulling it prying on the edge of the lens in straight out of its metal tabs. the middle with a fingernail file or a small flat-tip screwdriver. Do not pry on the edge of the housing around the lens. Storing Your Car If you need to park your car for an Block the rear wheels. Cover the vehicle with a extended period (more than one ‘‘breathable’’ cover, one made month), there are several things you If the vehicle is to be stored for a from a porous material such as should do to prepare it for storage. longer period, it should be cotton. Nonporous materials, such Proper preparation helps prevent supported on jackstands so the as plastic sheeting, trap moisture, deterioration and makes it easier to tires are off the ground. which can damage the paint. get your car back on the road. If possible, store your car indoors. Leave one window open slightly (if If possible, run the engine for a the vehicle is being stored while periodically (preferably once Fill the fuel tank. indoors). a month). Change the engine oil and filter Disconnect the battery. If you store your car for 1 year or (see page 255 ). longer, have your Acura dealer Support the front wiper blade perform the inspections called for in Wash and dry the exterior arms with a folded towel or rag so the 2 years/30,000 miles (48,000 km) completely. they do not touch the windshield. maintenance schedule (Normal Conditions) as soon as you take it Clean the interior. Make sure the To minimize sticking, apply a out of storage (see page 244 ). The carpeting, floor mats, etc. are silicone spray lubricant to all door replacements called for in the completely dry. and trunk seals. Also, apply a maintenance schedule are not vehicle body wax to the painted needed unless the vehicle has Leave the parking brake off. Put surfaces that mate with the door actually reached that time or mileage. the transmission in Park. and trunk seals. Maintenance 297 298 Regular cleaning and polishing of your Acura helps to keep it ‘‘new’’ looking. This section gives you hints on how to clean your car and preserve its appearance: the paint, brightwork, wheels and interior. Also included are several things you can do to help prevent corrosion. Appearance Care Exterior Care ................................. . 300 Washing ..................................... . 300 Waxing ....................................... . 301 Aluminum Wheels .................... . 301 Paint Touch-up .......................... . 301 Interior Care .................................. . 302 Carpeting ................................... . 302 Floor Mats ................................. . 302 Fabric ......................................... . 303 Vinyl ........................................... . 303 Leather ....................................... . 303 Seat Belts ................................... . 303 Wood Trim ................................ . 304 Windows .................................... . 304 Air Fresheners .......................... . 304 Corrosion Protection .................... . 305 Body Repairs ................................. . 306 Appearance Care 299 Exterior Care Washing Rinse the vehicle thoroughly with When you have washed and rinsed Frequent washing helps preserve cool water to remove loose dirt. the whole exterior, dry it with a your car’s beauty. Dirt and grit can chamois or soft towel. Letting it scratch the paint, while tree sap and air-dry will cause dulling and water bird droppings can permanently ruin spots. the finish. As you dry the vehicle, inspect it for Wash your car in a shady area, not in chips and scratches that could allow direct sunlight. If the vehicle is corrosion to start. Repair them with parked in the sun, move it into the touch-up paint (see page ). shade and let the exterior cool down before you start. Only use the solvents and cleaners recommended in this Owner’s Manual. Check the body for road tar, tree sap, etc. Remove these stains with tar remover or turpentine. Rinse it off immediately so it does not harm the finish. Remember to re- wax these areas, even if the rest of the vehicle does not need waxing. 300 Appearance Care Fill a bucket with cool water. Mix in a mild detergent, such as dishwashing liquid or a product made especially for vehicle washing. Wash the vehicle using the water 301 and detergent solution and a soft- bristle brush, sponge, or soft cloth. Start at the top and work your way down. Rinse frequently. Chemical solvents and strong cleaners can damage the paint, metal, and plastic on your car. Exterior Care Waxing the top layer of the finish. You Paint Touch-up Always wash and dry the whole should use a polish on your Acura if Your dealer has touch-up paint to vehicle before waxing it. You should the finish does not have its original match your car’s color. The color wax your car, including the metal shine after using a wax. code is printed on a sticker on the trim, whenever water sits on the driver’s doorjamb. Take this code to surface in large patches. It should Cleaning tar, insects, etc. with your dealer so you are sure to get form into beads or droplets after removers also takes off the wax. the correct color. waxing. Remember to re-wax those areas, even if the rest of the vehicle does Inspect your car frequently for chips You should use a quality liquid or not need waxing. or scratches in the paint. Repair paste wax. Apply it according to the them right away to prevent corrosion instructions on the container. In Aluminum Wheels of the metal underneath. Use the general, there are two types of Clean your Acura’s aluminum alloy touch-up paint only on small chips products: wheels as you do the rest of the and scratches. More extensive paint exterior. Wash them with the same damage should be repaired by a Waxes ɻ A wax coats the finish and solution, and rinse them thoroughly. professional. protects it from damage by exposure to sunlight, air pollution, etc. You The wheels have a protective clear- should use a wax on your Acura coat that keeps the aluminum from when it is new. corroding and tarnishing. Using harsh chemicals, including some Polishes ɻ Polishes and cleaner/ commercial wheel cleaners or stiff waxes can restore the shine to paint brushes, can damage this clear-coat. that has oxidized and lost some of its Only use a mild detergent and soft shine. They normally contain mild brush or sponge to clean the wheels. abrasives and solvents that remove Appearance Care 301 Interior Care Carpeting Floor Mats Vacuum the carpeting frequently to remove dirt. Ground-in dirt will make the carpet wear out faster. Periodically shampoo the carpet to keep it looking new. Use one of the foam-type carpet cleaners on the market. Follow the instructions that come with the cleaner, applying it with a sponge or soft brush. Keep the carpeting as dry as possible by not adding water to the foam. 302 Appearance Care The Acura driver’s floor mat that came with your car was designed to be hooked over the floor mat anchor. This keeps the floor mat from sliding forward and possibly interfering with the pedals. If you remove the floor mat, make sure to re-anchor it when you put it back in your car. If you replace it, use an Acura floor mat that is designed to be used with the floor mat anchor in your car. If you use a non-Acura floor mat in the driver’s footwell, make sure it fits properly and that it can be used with the floor mat anchor. Do not put additional floor mats on top of the anchored mat, otherwise the additional mats may slide forward and interfere with the pedals. Interior Care Fabric Vinyl Seat Belts Vacuum dirt and dust out of the Remove dirt and dust with a vacuum material frequently. For general cleaner. Wipe the vinyl with a soft LOOP cleaning, use a solution of mild soap cloth dampened in a solution of mild and lukewarm water, letting it air dry. soap and water. Use the same To clean off stubborn spots, use a solution with a soft-bristle brush on commercially-available fabric cleaner. more difficult spots. You can also use Test it on a hidden area of the fabric commercially-available spray or first, to make sure it does not bleach foam-type vinyl cleaners. or stain the fabric. Follow the instructions that come with the Leather cleaner. Vacuum dirt and dust from the leather frequently. Pay particular attention to the pleats and seams. Clean the leather with a soft cloth If your seat belts get dirty, you can dampened with clear water, then use a soft brush with a mixture of buff it with a clean, dry cloth. If mild soap and warm water to clean further cleaning is needed, use a them. Do not use bleach, dye, or soap specifically for leather, such as cleaning solvents. They can weaken saddle soap. Apply this soap with a the belt material. Let the belts air- damp, soft cloth. Wipe down and dry before you use the vehicle. buff as described above. CONTINUED Appearance Care 303 Interior Care Dirt build-up in the loops of the seat Windows Air Fresheners belt anchors can cause the belts to Clean the windows, inside and out, If you want to use an air freshener/ retract slowly. Wipe the insides of with a commercially-available glass deodorizer in the interior of your car, the loops with a clean cloth cleaner. You can also use a mixture it is best to use a solid type. Some dampened in mild soap and warm of one part white vinegar to ten parts liquid air fresheners contain chemi- water or isopropyl alcohol. water. This will remove the haze that cals that may cause parts of the builds up on the inside of the interior trim and fabric to crack or Wood Trim windows. Use a soft cloth or paper discolor. Clean the wood trim with a soft cloth towels to clean all glass and clear dipped in clear water and wipe it dry plastic surfaces. If you use a liquid air freshener, with another soft cloth. Soap may make sure you fasten it securely so it leave a film that dulls the finish. does not spill as you drive. The rear window def ogger and antenna wires are bonded to the inside of the glass. Wiping vigorously up-and- down can dislodge and break these wires. When cleaning the rear window, use gentle pressure and wipe side-to- side. 304 Appearance Care Two factors normally contribute to causing corrosion in your car: 1. 2. Moisture trapped in body cavities. Dirt and road salt that collects in hollows on the underside of the vehicle stays damp, promoting corrosion in that area. Removal of paint and protective coatings from the exterior and underside of the vehicle. Many corrosion-preventive measures are built into your Acura. You can help keep your car from corroding by performing some simple periodic maintenance: Repair chips and scratches in the paint as soon as you discover them. Inspect and clean out the drain holes in the bottom of the doors and body. Check the floor coverings for dampness. Carpeting and floor mats may remain damp for a long time, especially in winter. This dampness can eventually cause the floor panels to corrode. Corrosion Protection Use a high-pressure spray to clean the underside of your car. This is especially important in areas that use road salt in winter. It is also a good idea in humid climates and areas subject to salt air. Be careful of the ABS wheel sensors and wiring at each wheel. Have the corrosion-preventive coatings on the underside of your car inspected and repaired periodically. Appearance Care 305 Body Repairs Body repairs can affect your car’s When reporting your collision to the resistance to corrosion. If your car insurance company, tell them you needs repairs after a collision, pay want Acura parts used in the repair. close attention to the parts used in Although most insurers recognize the repair and the quality of the the quality of original parts, some work. may try to specify that the repairs be done with other available parts. You Make sure the repair facility uses should investigate this before any Acura replacement body parts. Some repairs have begun. companies make sheet metal pieces that seem to duplicate the original Take your car to your authorized Acura body parts, but are actually Acura dealer for inspection after the inferior in fit, finish, and corrosion repairs are completed. Your dealer resistance. Once installed, they do can make sure that quality materials not give the same high-quality were used, and that corrosion- appearance. preventive coatings were applied to all repaired and replaced parts. 306 Appearance Care Taking Care of the Unexpected This section covers the more- Compact Spare Tire ...................... . 308 common problems that motorists Changing a Flat Tire .................... . 309 experience with their vehicles. It If Your Engine Won’t Start .......... . 314 gives you information about how to Nothing Happens or the safely evaluate the problem and what Starter Motor Operates to do to correct it. If the problem has Very Slowly ........................ . 314 stranded you on the side of the road, The Starter Operates you may be able to get going again. Normally ................................ . 315 If not, you will also find instructions Jump Starting ................................ . 316 on getting your car towed. If Your Engine Overheats ............ . 319 Low Oil Pressure Indicator ......... . 321 Charging System Indicator .......... . 322 Malfunction Indicator Lamp ....... . 323 Readiness Codes ....................... . 324 Brake System Indicator ............... . 325 Closing the Moonroof .................. . 326 Fuses .............................................. . 327 Checking and Replacing .......... . 328 Emergency Towing ...................... . 332 Taking Care of the Unexpected 307 Compact Spare Tire Your car has a compact spare tire Follow these precautions whenever that takes up less space. Use this you are using the compact spare tire: spare tire as a temporary replace- ment only. Get your regular tire repaired or replaced and put it back on your car as soon as you can. The compact spare tire has a shorter tread life than a regular tire. Replace it when you can see the tread wear indicator bars. The replacement should be the same size and design tire, mounted on the same wheel. The compact spare tire is not designed to be mounted on a regular Turn off the VSA system (see wheel, and the compact wheel is not page ). designed for mounting a regular tire. Driving with the compact spare tire may activate the VSA system. Taking Care of the Unexpected INDICATOR LOCATION MARK Do not exceed 50 mph (80 km/h) under any circumstances. This tire gives a harsher ride and Check the inflation pressure of the less traction on some road sur- compact spare tire every time you faces than the regular tire. Use check the other tires. It should be greater caution while driving on inflated to: this tire. 60 psi (420 kPa , 4.2 kgf/cm ) Do not mount snow chains on the TREAD WEAR INDICATOR BAR compact spare. The wheel of the compact spare tire is designed especially to fit your car. Do not use your spare tire on another vehicle unless it is the same make and model. 228 308 If you have a flat tire while driving, stop in a safe place to change it. Stopping in traffic or on the shoulder of a busy road is dangerous. Drive slowly along the shoulder until you get to an exit or an area to stop that is far away from the traffic lanes. The vehicle can easily roll off the jack, seriously injuring anyone underneath. Follow the directions for changing a tire exactly, and never get under the vehicle when it is supported only by the jack. Changing a Flat Tire TRUNK FLOOR HOOK 3. Open the trunk. Raise the trunk floor by lifting up on the back edge. To keep the trunk floor out of the way, attach the hook into the slot in the trunk lid. 4. Take the tool kit out of the trunk. 5. Unscrew the wing bolt and take the spare tire out of its well. JACK SPARE TIRE TOOL KIT 1. Park the vehicle on firm, level, and non-slippery ground away from traffic. Put the transmission in Park. Apply the parking brake. If you are towing a trailer, unhitch the trailer. 2. Turn on the hazard warning lights, and turn the ignition switch to LOCK (0). Have all the passengers get out of the vehicle while you change the tire. CONTINUED Taking Care of the Unexpected 309 Changing a Flat Tire JACK WHEEL WRENCH 310 6. Turn the jack’s end bracket 7. Loosen the five wheel nuts 1/2 8. counterclockwise to loosen it, then turn with the wheel wrench. remove the jack by lifting it straight up. Taking Care of the Unexpected Locate the jacking point nearest the tire you need to change. It is pointed to by a mark molded into the underside of the body. Place the jack under the jacking point. Turn the end bracket clockwise until the top of the jack contacts the jacking point. Make sure the jacking point tab is resting in the jack notch. JACKING POINT Use 9. the extension and wheel 10. 11. wrench as shown to raise the vehicle until the flat tire is off the ground. EXTENSION WHEEL WRENCH Remove the wheel nuts, then remove the flat tire. Temporarily place the flat tire on the ground with the outside surface of the wheel facing up. You could scratch the wheel if you put it face down. Changing a Flat Tire BRAKE HUB Before mounting the spare tire, wipe any dirt off the mounting surface of the wheel and hub with a clean cloth. Wipe the hub carefully, it may be hot from driving. CONTINUED Taking Care of the Unexpected 311 Changing a Flat Tire 312 12. Put on the spare tire. Put the 13. Lower the vehicle to the ground 14. wheel nuts back on finger-tight, and remove the jack. then tighten them in a crisscross pattern with the wheel wrench until the wheel is firmly against the hub. Do not try to tighten them fully. Taking Care of the Unexpected Tighten the wheel nuts securely in the same crisscross pattern. Have the wheel nut torque checked at the nearest automotive service facility. Tighten the wheel nuts to: 80 lbf·ft (108 N·m , 11 kgf·m) Place 15. Remove the spacer basket from 16. 17. the flat tire face down in the the trunk well. spare tire well. 18. Wrap the spacer cone and spare tire wing bolt with cloth or paper and store them in the trunk well. SPACER BASKET Changing a Flat Tire FLAT TIRE RING SPACER CONE CENTER CAP WING BOLT Remove the center cap before storing the flat tire in the trunk well. CONTINUED Taking Care of the Unexpected 313 Changing a Flat Tire, If Your Engine Won’t Start 19. Slip the hole at the top of the jack If Your Engine Won’t Start Nothing Happens or the Starter over the bracket in the trunk well. Motor Operates Very Slowly Turn the jack’s end bracket to lock it in place. Store the tool kit back in its place. 20. 21. 22. Close the trunk lid. 314 Taking Care of the Unexpected Diagnosing why your engine won’t start falls into two areas, depending on what you hear when you turn the key to START (III): You hear nothing, or almost nothing. The engine’s starter motor does not operate at all, or operates very slowly. You can hear the starter motor operating normally, or the starter motor sounds like it is spinning faster than normal, but the engine does not start up and run. When you turn the ignition switch to START (III), you do not hear the normal noise of the engine trying to start. You may hear a clicking sound or series of clicks, or nothing at all. Check these things: Loose items can fly around the interior in a crash and could Your car has the Immobilizer seriously injure the occupants. System. You should use a properly-coded master or valet key Store the wheel, jack, and tools to start the engine (see page ). securely before driving. A key that is not properly coded will cause the immobilizer system indicator in the dash panel to blink rapidly. Check the transmission interlock. The transmission must be in Park or Neutral or the starter will not operate. 80 Unclip the hook from the trunk lid and lower the trunk floor. Store the center cap and spacer basket in the trunk. Make sure the center cap will not get scratched or damaged. Turn the ignition switch to ON (II). Turn on the headlights and check their brightness. If the headlights are very dim or don’t light at all, the battery is discharged. See Jump Starting on page 316 . Turn the ignition switch to START (III). If the headlights do not dim, check the condition of the fuses. If the fuses are OK, there is proba- bly something wrong with the electrical circuit for the ignition switch or starter motor. You will need a qualified technician to determine the problem. (See Emergency Towing on page 332 .) If Your Engine Won’t Start If the headlights dim noticeably or Do you have fuel? Turn the go out when you try to start the ignition switch to ON (II) for a engine, either the battery is dis- minute and watch the fuel gauge. charged or the connections are The low fuel level warning light corroded. Check the condition of may not be working, so you were the battery and terminal connec- not reminded to fill the tank. tions (see page 272 ). You can then try jump starting the vehicle There may be an electrical from a booster battery (see page problem, such as no power to the 316 ). fuel pump. Check all the fuses (see page ). If you find nothing wrong, you will need a qualified technician to find the problem. See on page . Are you using the proper starting procedure? Refer to on page 217 . Taking Care of the Unexpected 328 The Starter Operates Normally In this case, the starter motor’s speed sounds normal, or even faster than normal, when you turn the Emergency ignition switch to START (III), but Towing 332 the engine does not run. Starting the Engine 315 Jump Starting If your car’s battery has run down, you may be able to start the engine by using a booster battery. Although this seems like a simple procedure, you should take several precautions. 316 Taking Care of the Unexpected You cannot start your Acura by pushing or pulling it. A battery can explode if you do not follow the correct procedure, seriously injuring anyone nearby. Keep all sparks, open flames, and smoking materials away from the battery. To jump start your car, follow these directions closely: 1. Open the hood and check the physical condition of the battery (see page 272 ). In very cold weather, check the condition of the electrolyte. If it seems slushy or like ice, do not try jump starting until it thaws. Jump Starting 317 If a battery sits in extreme cold, the electrolyte inside can f reeze. Attempting to jump start with a f rozen battery can cause it to rupture. Turn 2. off all the electrical acces- sories: climate control, stereo system, lights, etc. Put the transmission in Neutral or Park, and set the parking brake. 3. Connect one jumper cable to the 4. Connect the second jumper cable positive ( ɹ ) terminal on your to the negative ( ɻ ) terminal on Acura’s battery. Connect the other the booster battery. Connect the end to the positive ( ɹ ) terminal other end to the ground wire on on the booster battery. the right side of the engine as shown. Do not connect this jumper cable to any other part of the engine. 5. If the booster battery is in another vehicle, have an assistant start that vehicle and run it at a fast idle. CONTINUED Taking Care of the Unexpected Jump Starting Taking Care of the Unexpected 7. Once your car is running, discon- nect the negative cable from your car, then from the booster battery. Disconnect the positive cable from your car, then the booster battery. Keep the ends of the jumper cables away from each other and any metal on the vehicle until all are disconnected. Otherwise, you may cause an electrical short. BOOSTER BATTERY Follow the number order in the illustration to connect the jumper cables. Make sure to disconnect the cables in the reverse order. 6. Start your car. If the starter motor still operates slowly, check the jumper cable connections to make sure they have good metal-to- metal contact. 318 The pointer of your car’s tempera- ture gauge should stay in the mid- range under most conditions. It may go higher if you are driving up a long steep hill on a very hot day. If it climbs to the red mark, you should determine the reason. Driving with the temperature gauge pointer at the red mark can cause serious damage to your engine. Your car can overheat for several reasons, such as lack of coolant or a mechanical problem. The only indication may be the temperature gauge climbing to or above the red mark. Or you may see steam or spray coming from under the hood. In either case, you should take immediate action. Steam and spray from an overheated engine can seriously scald you. Do not open the hood if steam is coming out. If Your Engine Overheats 1. Safely pull to the side of the road. Put the transmission in Neutral or Park and set the parking brake. Turn off the climate control and all other accessories. Turn on the hazard warning indicators. 2. If you see steam and/or spray coming from under the hood, turn off the engine. 3. If you do not see steam or spray, leave the engine running and watch the temperature gauge. If the high heat is due to overloading (climbing a long, steep hill on a hot day with the A/C running, for example), the engine should start to cool down almost immediately. If it does, wait until the tempera- ture gauge comes down to the mid- point, then continue driving. CONTINUED Taking Care of the Unexpected 319 If Your Engine Overheats 4. If the temperature gauge stays at reaches the middle of the tempera- 10. Start the engine and set the the red mark, turn off the engine. ture gauge, or lower, before check- temperature control dial to ing the radiator. maximum (climate control to 5. Wait until you see no more signs FULL AUTO at 90°F/32°C). Add of steam or spray, then open the coolant to the radiator up to the hood. base of the filler neck. If you do Removing the radiator cap not have the proper coolant 6. Look for any obvious coolant leaks, while the engine is hot can mixture available, you can add such as a split radiator hose. cause the coolant to spray out, plain water. Remember to have Everything is still extremely hot, seriously scalding you. the cooling system drained and so use caution. If you find a leak, it refilled with the proper mixture as must be repaired before you Always let the engine and soon as you can. continue driving (see Emergency radiator cool down before Towing on page 332 ). removing the radiator cap. 11. Put the radiator cap back on tightly. Run the engine and watch 7. If you don’t find an obvious leak, the temperature gauge. If it goes check the coolant level in the Using gloves or a large heavy back to the red mark, the engine radiator reserve tank (see page cloth, turn the radiator cap needs repair. (See Emergency 208 ). If the level is below the counterclockwise, without pushing Towing on page 332 .) MIN mark, add coolant to halfway down, to the first stop. This between the MIN and MAX marks. releases any remaining pressure in 12. If the temperature stays normal, the cooling system. After the check the coolant level in the 8. If there was no coolant in the pressure releases, push down on radiator reserve tank. If it has reserve tank, you may also have to the cap and turn it until it comes gone down, add coolant to the add coolant to the radiator. Let the off. MAX mark. Put the cap back on engine cool down until the pointer tightly. Taking Care of the Unexpected 9. 320 Low Oil Pressure Indicator 4. Start the engine and watch the oil pressure indicator. If the light Running the engine with low oil does not go out within ten seconds, pressure can cause serious mechanical turn off the engine. There is a damage almost immediately. Turn of f mechanical problem that needs to the engine as soon as you can saf ely get be repaired before you can the vehicle stopped. continue driving. (See Emergency Towing on page 332 .) 1. Safely pull off the road and shut off the engine. Turn on the hazard warning indicators. LOW OIL PRESSURE INDICATOR 2. Let the vehicle sit for a minute. This indicator should light when the Open the hood and check the oil ignition switch is ON (II), and go out level (see page 207 ). Although oil after the engine starts. It should level and oil pressure are not never come on when the engine is directly connected, an engine that running. If it starts flashing, it is very low on oil can lose pressure indicates that the oil pressure during cornering and other driving dropped very low for a moment, then maneuvers. recovered. If the indicator stays on with the engine running, it shows 3. If necessary, add oil to bring the that the engine has lost oil pressure level back to the full mark on the and serious engine damage is dipstick (see page 253 ). possible. In either case, you should take immediate action. Taking Care of the Unexpected 321 Charging System Indicator Taking Care of the Unexpected Immediately turn off all electrical accessories: radio, climate control, rear defogger, cruise control, etc. Try not to use other electrically- operated controls such as the power windows. Keep the engine running and take extra care not to stall it. Starting the engine will discharge the battery rapidly. CHARGING SYSTEM INDICATOR This indicator should come on when the ignition switch is ON (II), and go out after the engine starts. If it comes on brightly when the engine is running, it indicates that the charging system has stopped charging the battery. 322 By eliminating as much of the electrical load as possible, you can drive several miles (kilometers) before the battery is too discharged to keep the engine running. Drive to a service station or garage where you can get technical assistance. Malfunction Indicator Lamp MALFUNCTION INDICATOR LAMP If you have recently refueled your car, the cause of this indicator coming on could be a loose or If you keep driving with the missing fuel fill cap. Check the cap malf unction indicator lamp on, you can and tighten it until it clicks several damage your car’s emissions controls times. Replace the fuel fill cap if it is and engine. Those repairs may not be missing. Tightening the cap will not covered by your car’s warranties. make the indicator turn off immediately; it takes at least three days of normal driving. If the indicator remains on past that, or the fuel cap was not loose or This indicator should light when the missing, have the vehicle checked by ignition switch is ON (II), and go out the dealer as soon as possible. Drive after the engine starts. If it comes on moderately until the dealer has at any other time, it indicates one of inspected the problem. Avoid full- the engine’s emissions control throttle acceleration and driving at systems may have a problem. Even high speed. though you may feel no difference in your car’s performance, it can You should also have the dealer reduce your fuel economy and cause inspect your car if this indicator your car to put out excessive comes on repeatedly, even though it emissions. Continued operation may may turn off as you continue driving. cause serious damage. Taking Care of the Unexpected 323 Malfunction Indicator Lamp Readiness Codes Your car has certain ‘‘readiness codes’’ that are part of the on-board diagnostics for the emissions systems. In some states, part of the emissions testing is to make sure these codes are set. If they are not set, the test cannot be completed. If your car’s battery has been disconnected or gone dead, these codes are erased. It takes several days of driving under various conditions to set the codes again. 324 Taking Care of the Unexpected If possible, do not take your car for a state emissions test until the readiness codes are set. See State Emissions Testing on pages 348 and 349 . BRAKE SYSTEM INDICATOR U.S. indicator shown ˎ ˎ The Brake System Indicator normally comes on when you turn the ignition switch ON (II). It is a reminder to check the parking brake. It comes on and stays lit if you do not fully release the parking brake. If it comes on at any other time, it indicates a problem with the vehicle’s brake system. In most cases, the problem is a low fluid level in the brake fluid reservoir. Press lightly on the brake pedal to see if it feels normal. If it does, check the brake fluid level the next time you stop at a service station (see page ). If the fluid level is low, take the vehicle to your dealer and have the brake system inspected for leaks or worn brake pads. However, if the brake pedal does not feel normal, you should take immediate action. Because of the brake system’s dual-circuit design, a problem in one part of the system will still give you braking at two wheels. You will feel the brake pedal go down much farther before the vehicle begins to slow down, and you will have to press harder on the pedal. The distance needed to stop will be much longer. 266 Brake System Indicator Slow down by shifting to a lower gear, and pull to the side of the road when it is safe. Because of the longer distance needed to stop, it is hazardous to drive the vehicle. You should have it towed, and repaired as soon as possible. (See Emergency Towing on page 332 .) If you must drive the vehicle a short distance in this condition, drive slowly and cautiously. If the ABS indicator and the VSA system indicator come on with this indicator, have the vehicle inspected by your dealer immediately. Taking Care of the Unexpected 325 Closing the Moonroof If the electric motor will not close the moonroof, do the following: Check the fuse for the moonroof motor (see page ). If the fuse is blown, replace it with one of the same or lower rating. Try closing the moonroof. If the new fuse blows immediately or the moonroof motor still does not operate, you can close the moonroof manually. Insert the moonroof wrench into the socket behind this plug. Turn the wrench until the moonroof is fully closed. Remove the lens from the rear ceiling light (see page ). Taking Care of the Unexpected SOCKET 1. 2. 3. 4. 328 295 PLUG 5. Remove the plug in the center of 6. Get the moonroof wrench out of the rear ceiling light. the tool kit in the trunk. 7. Remove the wrench. Reinstall the plug and lens. 326 All the electrical circuits in your car have fuses to protect them from a short circuit or overload. These fuses are located in two fuse boxes. The interior fuse box is underneath the dashboard on the driver’s side. To open it, turn the knob as shown. INTERIOR KNOB Fuses UNDER-HOOD TAB The under-hood fuse box is located in the engine compartment next to the battery. To open it, push the tab as shown. Taking Care of the Unexpected 327 Fuses Checking and Replacing Fuses If something electrical in your car FUSE stops working, the first thing you Taking Care of the Unexpected FUSE PULLER should check for is a blown fuse. Determine from the chart on pages 330 and 331 , or the diagram on the fuse box lid, which fuse or fuses control that component. Check those fuses first, but check all the fuses before deciding that a blown fuse is not the cause. Replace any blown BLOWN fuses and check the component’s operation. 3. 1. 2. Check each of the large fuses in 4. the under-hood fuse box by looking through the top at the wire inside. Removing these fuses requires a Phillips-head screw- driver. Check the smaller fuses in the Turn the ignition switch to LOCK under-hood fuse box and all the (0). Make sure the headlights and fuses in the interior fuse box by all other accessories are off. pulling out each fuse with the fuse puller provided in the door of the Remove the cover from the fuse interior fuse box. box. 328 5. Fuses If you cannot drive the vehicle BLOWN without fixing the problem, and you do not have a spare fuse, take a fuse Replacing a f use with one that has a of the same rating or a lower rating higher rating greatly increases the from one of the other circuits. Make chances of damaging the electrical sure you can do without that circuit system. If you do not have a replace- temporarily (such as the cigarette ment f use with the proper rating f or the lighter or radio). circuit, install one with a lower rating. If you replace the blown fuse with a 6. If the replacement fuse of the spare fuse that has a lower rating, it same rating blows in a short time, might blow out again. This does not there is probably a serious indicate anything wrong. Replace the electrical problem in your car. Look for a burned wire inside the fuse with one of the correct rating as Leave the blown fuse in that fuse. If it is burned, replace it with soon as you can. circuit and have your car checked one of the spare fuses of the same by a qualified mechanic. rating or lower. If the radio fuse is removed, the audio system will disable itself. The next time you turn on the radio you will see ‘‘ ’’ in the frequency display. Use the Preset buttons to enter the five-digit code (see page 180 ). CONTINUED Taking Care of the Unexpected 329 Fuses UNDER-HOOD FUSE BOX 330 Taking Care of the Unexpected No. Amps. CircuitsProtected No. Amps. CircuitsProtected 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15 ɻ Not Used 16 20 A Front Fog Light 20 A Brake, Horn 17 20 A ETS (Electrical Tilt/ 10 A Hazard Telescope Steering) 20 A Driver Power Window 18 15 A Meter 15 A TCS 19 7.5 A Back-up, Radio 20 A VSA 20 20 A Interior Lights 20 A Power Door Lock 21 30 A Wiper Motor 20 A Right Headlight Low 22 50 A Ignition Switch 20 A Left Headlight Low 23 40 A Power Window 20 A Cooling Fan 24 40 A Heater Motor 10 A Left Headlight High 25 120 A Battery 10 A Right Headlight High 26 40 A VSA Motor 20 A Condenser Fan 27 40 A Rear Window Defogger 30 A Moonroof 28 50 A Fuse box 30 A Front Passenger’s Power Seat INTERIOR FUSE BOX Fuses No. Amps. CircuitsProtected No. Amps. CircuitsProtected 1 15 A Small Light 14 7.5 A Starter Signal 2 ɻ Not Used (OP) 15 7.5 A ACG 3 7.5 A Condenser Fan Relay, 16 10 A ACC Socket Cooling Fan Relay 17 7.5 A Power Window MPCS 4 10 A ACC, Radio 18 20 A Front Right Power Window 5 20 A A/C Clutch, Front Heated 19 7.5 A Mirror Seat 20 20 A ECU (Body) 6 20 A ECU (PCM) 21 20 A Rear Left Power Window 7 10 A SRS 22 20 A Fuel Pump Driver’s Power Seat 23 7.5 A SRS 8 20 A Reclining/Rear Height/ 24 20 A Rear Right Power Window Power Lumber 25 30 A Ignition Coils 9 20 A Bose Audio System 26 ɻ Not Used 10 10 A Daytime Running Lights ˎ 1 11 20 A Driver’s Power Seat Slide/ Front Height 12 7.5 A Daytime Running Lights ˎ 1 13 7.5 A Meter, Moonroof ˎ 1 : On Canadian models Taking Care of the Unexpected 331 Emergency Towing If your car needs to be towed, call a ɻ The tow professional towing service or, if you truck uses metal cables with hooks belong to one, an organization that on the ends. These hooks go around provides roadside assistance. Never parts of the frame or suspension and tow your car behind another vehicle the cables lift that end of the vehicle with just a rope or chain. It is very off the ground. Your car’s sus- dangerous. pension and body can be seriously damaged. There are three popular types of professional towing equipment. Flat-bed Equipment The operator loads your car on the back of a truck. Wheel-lift Equipment The tow truck uses two pivoting arms that go under the tires (front or rear) and lift them off the ground. The other two tires remain on the ground. Taking Care of the Unexpected Sling-type Equipment This is the best way to transport your Acura. This is an acceptable way to tow your Acura. This method of towing is unacceptable. If your Acura cannot be transported ɻ by flat-bed, it should be towed by wheel-lift equipment with the front wheels off the ground. If, due to damage, your car must be towed with the front wheels on the ground, ɻ do the following. Release the parking brake. Shift the transmission to Neutral. 332 With the front wheels on the ground, it is best to tow the vehicle no farther than 50 miles (80 km), and keep the speed below 35 mph (55 km/h). Improper towing preparation will damage the transmission. Follow the above procedure exactly. If you cannot shif t the transmission or start the engine, your car must be transported with the f ront wheels of f the ground. If you decide to tow your car with all four wheels on the ground, make sure you use a properly-designed and attached tow bar. Prepare the vehicle for towing as described above, and leave the ignition switch in Accessory (I) so the steering wheel does not lock. Make sure the radio and any items plugged into the accessory power socket are turned off so they do not run down the battery. The steering system can be damaged if the steering wheel is locked. Leave the ignition switch in Accessory (I), and make sure the steering wheel turns f reely bef ore you begin towing. Trying to lif t or tow your car by the bumpers will cause serious damage. The bumpers are not designed to support the vehicle’s weight. Emergency Towing Taking Care of the Unexpected 333 334 The diagrams in this section give you the dimensions and capacities of your Acura, and the locations of the identification numbers. It also includes information you should know about your car’s tires and emissions control systems. ................ Identification Numbers . 336 ................................ Specifications . 338 DOT Tire Quality Grading ............................. (U.S. Cars) . 340 ................................. Treadwear . 340 ...................................... Traction . 340 ............................. Temperature . 341 ........................... Tire Information . 342 ......................... Oxygenated Fuels . 343 ...... Driving in Foreign Countries . 344 Technical Information Emissions Controls ....................... . 345 The Clean Air Act ..................... . 345 Crankcase Emissions Control System .................................... . 345 Evaporative Emissions Control System .................................... . 345 Onboard Refueling Vapor Recovery ................................ . 345 Exhaust Emissions Controls ... . 346 PGM-FI System .................... . 346 Ignition Timing Control System ................................ . 346 Exhaust Gas Recirculation (EGR) System ................... . 346 Three Way Catalytic Converter ........................... . 346 Replacement Parts .................... . 346 Three Way Catalytic Converter .. . 347 State Emissions Testing .............. . 348 Technical Information 335 Identification Numbers Your car has several identifying numbers located in various places. The Vehicle Identification Number (VIN) is the 17-digit number your Acura dealer uses to register your car for warranty purposes. It is also necessary for licensing and insuring your car. The easiest place to find the VIN is on a plate fastened to the top of the dashboard. You can see it by looking through the windshield on the driver’s side. It is also on the Certification label attached to the driver’s doorjamb, and is stamped on the engine compartment bulkhead. The VIN is also provided in bar code on the Certification label. 336 Technical Information ˎ VEHICLE IDENTIFICATION NUMBER CERTIFICATION LABEL The U.S. car model The Engine Number is stamped into the engine block. It is on the front left, below the valve cover. The Transmission Number is on a label on top of the transmission. Identification Numbers TRANSMISSION NUMBER ENGINE NUMBER Technical Information 337 Specifications Dimensions Capacities Length 196.7 in (4,995 mm) Fuel tank Approx. Width 71.7 in (1,820 mm) 18.0 US gal (68 ) Height 54.5 in (1,385 mm) Engine Change ˎ 1 1.61 US gal (6.1 ) Wheelbase 114.6 in (2,910 mm) coolant Total 2.27 US gal (8.6 ) Track Front 61.0 in (1,550 mm) Engine oil Change ˎ 2 Rear 60.6 in (1,540 mm) Including filter 4.9 US qt (4.6 ) Without filter Weights Total 5.6 US qt (5.3 ) Gross vehicle weight rating See the certification label attached Automatic Change 3.2 US qt (3.0 ) to the driver’s doorjamb. transmission Total 9.1 US qt (8.6 ) fluid Air Conditioning Differential Change 1.11 US qt (1.05 ) Refrigerant type HFC-134a (R-134a) oil Total 1.16 US qt (1.10 ) Charge quantity 24.7 26.5 oz (700 750 g) Windshield U.S. Cars 2.6 US qt (2.5 ) Lubricant type ND-OIL8 washer Canada Cars 6.9 US qt (6.5 ) reservoir 1 : 0.172 US gal (0.65 ) 2 : Excluding the oil remaining in the engine. 338 Technical Information 4.5 US qt (4.3 ) ɻ ɻ ˎ ˎ Including the coolant in the reserve tank and that remaining in the engine. Reserve tank capacity: Specifications Lights Engine Headlights ˎ 1 12 V ɻ 55 W (H1) (High beam) Type Water cooled 4-stroke Front turn signal/parking lights 12 V ɻ 27/8 W SOHC V-6 gasoline engine Rear turn signal lights 12 V ɻ 21 W Bore x Stroke 3.54 x 3.58 in (90 x 91 mm) Brake/Taillights 12 V ɻ 21/5 W Displacement 212 cu-in (3,474 cm ) Front fog lights 12 V ɻ 55 W (H1) Compression ratio 9.6 : 1 High-mount brake light 12 V ɻ 21 W Spark plugs See spark plug maintenance Front side marker lights 12 V ɻ 3 CP section page 272 . Back-up lights 12 V ɻ 21 W License plate lights 12 V ɻ 3 CP Alignment Ceiling lights Front 12 V ɻ 5 W Toe Front 0.00 in (0.0 mm) Rear 12 V ɻ 5 W Rear in 0.08 in (2.0 mm) Trunk light 12 V ɻ 3.4 W Camber Front 0° Door courtesy lights 12 V ɻ 3.4 W Rear ɻ 0°30’ Vanity mirror light 12 V ɻ 2 W Caster Front 2°50’ ˎ 1 : Low beam headlight bulbs are a type of high voltage discharge Tires tube (D2R). Size Front/Rear P225/55R16 94V Spare T135/80D16 101M Battery Pressure Front/Rear 30 psi (210 kPa , 2.1 kgf/cm ) Capacity 12 V ɻ 55 AH/5 HR Spare 60 psi (420 kPa , 4.2 kgf/cm ) 12 V ɻ 65 AH/20 HR Fuses Interior See page 331 or the fuse label attached to the inside of the fuse box door under the dashboard. Under-hood See page 330 or the fuse box cover. Technical Information 339 DOT Tire Quality Grading (U.S. Cars) The tires on your car meet all U.S. Federal Safety Requirements. All tires are also graded for treadwear, traction, and temperature perform- ance according to Department of Transportation (DOT) standards. The following explains these gradings. Quality grades can be found where applicable on the tire sidewall between the tread shoulder and the maximum section width. For example: Technical Information Treadwear Uniform Tire Quality Grading Treadwear 200 Traction AA Temperature A The traction grades, from highest to lowest, are AA, A, B, and C. Those grades represent the tire’s ability to stop on wet pavement as measured under controlled conditions on specified government test surfaces of asphalt and concrete. A tire marked C may have poor traction performance. Warning: The traction grade assigned to this tire is based on straight-ahead braking traction tests, and does not include acceleration, cornering, hydroplaning, or peak traction characteristics. All passenger vehicle tires must conform to Federal Safety Requirements in addition to these grades. ɻ The treadwear grade is a compara- tive rating based on the wear rate of the tire when tested under controlled conditions on a specified government test course. For example, a tire graded 150 would wear one and one- half (1 1/2) times as well on the government course as a tire graded 100. The relative performance of tires depends upon the actual condi- tions of their use, however, and may depart significantly from the norm due to variations in driving habits, service practices and differences in road characteristics and climate. Traction AA, A, B, C 340 DOT Tire Quality Grading (U.S. Cars) Temperature ɻ A, B, C Warning: The temperature grade for The temperature grades are A (the this tire is established for a tire that highest), B, and C, representing the is properly inflated and not over- tire’s resistance to the generation of loaded. Excessive speed, underinfla- heat and its ability to dissipate heat tion, or excessive loading, either when tested under controlled separately or in combination, can conditions on a specified indoor cause heat buildup and possible tire laboratory test wheel. Sustained high failure. temperature can cause the material of the tire to degenerate and reduce tire life, and excessive temperature can lead to sudden tire failure. The grade C corresponds to a level of performance which all passenger vehicle tires must meet under the Federal Motor Vehicle Safety Standard No. 109. Grades B and A represent higher levels of performance on the laboratory test wheel than the minimum required by law. Technical Information 341 Tire Information Tire Labeling Tire Size Tire Identification Number 342 ɻ ɻ ɻ ɻ ɻ ɻ ɻ The tires that came on your car have a number of markings. Those you should be aware of are described below. Whenever tires are replaced, they should be replaced with tires of the same size. Following is an example tire size with an explanation of what each component means. Vehicle type (P indicates passenger vehicle). Tire width in millimeters. Aspect ratio (the tire’s section height as a percentage of its width). Tire construction code (R indicates radial). Rim diameter in inches. Speed symbol (an alphabetical code indicating the maximum speed rating). Tire Identification Number (TIN) is a group of numbers and letters that look like the following example TIN. This indicates that the tire meets all requirements of the U.S. Department of Transportation. Manufacturer’s identification mark. Tire type code. 2202 Technical Information 16 DOT B97R FW6X Date of manufacture. P 225 55 R 94 V Load index (a numerical code associated with the maximum load the tire can carry). P225/55R16 94V ɻ DOT B97R FW6X 2202 ɻ ɻ ɻ Some conventional gasolines are being blended with alcohol or an ether compound. These gasolines are collectively referred to as oxygenated fuels. To meet clean air standards, some areas of the United States and Canada use oxygenated fuels to help reduce emissions. If you use an oxygenated fuel, be sure it is unleaded and meets the minimum octane rating requirement. Before using an oxygenated fuel, try to confirm the fuel’s contents. Some states/provinces require this information to be posted on the pump. Oxygenated Fuels The following are the U.S. EPA and Canadian CGSB approved percentages of oxygenates: Technical Information 343 If you notice any undesirable operating symptoms, try another service station or switch to another brand of gasoline. ETHANOL (ethyl or grain alcohol) You may use gasoline containing up Fuel system damage or performance to 10 percent ethanol by volume. problems resulting from the use of Gasoline containing ethanol may be an oxygenated fuel containing more marketed under the name ‘‘Gasohol.’’ than the percentages of oxygenates given above are not covered under MTBE (Methyl Tertiary Butyl warranty. Ether) You may use gasoline containing up to 15 percent MTBE by volume. METHANOL (methyl or wood alcohol) Your car was not designed to use fuel that contains methanol. Methanol can corrode metal parts in the fuel system, and also damage plastic and rubber components. This damage would not be covered by your warranties. Driving in Foreign Countries If you are planning to take your Acura outside the U.S. or Canada, contact the tourist bureaus in the areas you will be traveling in to find out about the availability of unleaded gasoline with the proper octane rating. If unleaded gasoline is not available, be aware that using leaded gasoline in your Acura will affect perfor- mance and fuel mileage, and damage its emissions controls. It will no longer comply with U.S. and Canadian emissions regulations, and will be illegal to operate in North America. To bring your car back into compliance will require the replace- ment of several components, such as the oxygen sensors and the three way catalytic converter. These re- placements are not covered under warranty. 344 Technical Information Emissions Controls The burning of gasoline in your car’s The Clean Air Act Ventilation valve routes them from engine produces several byproducts. The United States Clean Air Act ˎ the crankcase back to the intake Some of these are carbon monoxide sets standards for automobile manifold. They are then drawn into (CO), oxides of nitrogen (NOx) and emissions. It also requires that the engine and burned. hydrocarbons (HC). Gasoline automobile manufacturers explain to evaporating from the tank also owners how their emissions controls Evaporative Emissions Control produces hydrocarbons. Controlling work and what to do to maintain System the production of NOx, CO, and HC them. This section summarizes how As gasoline evaporates in the fuel is important to the environment. the emissions controls work. tank, an evaporative emissions Under certain conditions of sunlight Scheduled maintenance is on page control canister filled with charcoal and climate, NOx and HC react to 244 . adsorbs the vapor. It is stored in this form photochemical ‘‘smog.’’ Carbon canister while the engine is off. After monoxide does not contribute to ˎ In Canada, Acura vehicles comply the engine is started and warmed up, smog creation, but it is a poisonous with the Canadian emission the vapor is drawn into the engine gas. requirements, as specified in an and burned during driving. agreement with Environment Canada, at the time they are Onboard Refueling Vapor manufactured. Recovery The Onboard Refueling Vapor Crankcase Emissions Control Recovery (ORVR) system captures System the fuel vapors during refueling. The Your car has a Positive Crankcase vapors are adsorbed in a canister Ventilation System. This keeps filled with activated carbon. While gasses that build up in the engine’s driving, the fuel vapors are drawn crankcase from going into the into the engine and burned off. atmosphere. The Positive Crankcase Technical Information 345 Emissions Controls Exhaust Emissions Controls Replacement Parts PGM-FI System Technical Information Ignition Timing Control System The exhaust emissions controls This system constantly adjusts the include four systems: PGM-FI, ignition timing, reducing the amount Ignition Timing Control, Exhaust of HC, CO, and NOx produced. Gas Recirculation and Three Way Catalytic Converter. These four Exhaust Gas Recirculation (EGR) systems work together to control the System engine’s combustion and minimize The Exhaust Gas Recirculation the amount of HC, CO, and NOx that (EGR) system takes some of the comes out the tailpipe. The exhaust exhaust gas and routes it back into emissions control systems are the intake manifold. Adding exhaust separate from the crankcase and gas to the air/fuel mixture reduces evaporative emissions control the amount of NOx produced when systems. the fuel is burned. Three Way Catalytic Converter The PGM-FI System uses sequential The three way catalytic converter is multiport fuel injection. in the exhaust system. Through It has three subsystems: Air Intake, chemical reactions, it converts HC, Engine Control, and Fuel Control. CO, and NOx in the engine’s exhaust The Powertrain Control Module to carbon dioxide (CO ), dinitrogen (PCM) uses various sensors to (N ), and water vapor. determine how much air is going into the engine. It then controls how much fuel to inject under all operat- ing conditions. The emissions control systems are designed and certified to work to- gether in reducing emissions to levels that comply with the Clean Air Act. To make sure the emissions remain low, you should use only new Acura replacement parts or their equivalent for repairs. Using lower quality parts may increase the emissions from your car. The emissions control systems are covered by warranties separate from the rest of your car. Read your warranty manual for more informa- tion. 2 2 346 The three way catalytic converter contains precious metals that serve as catalysts, promoting chemical reactions to convert the exhaust gasses without affecting the metals. The catalytic converter is referred to as a three-way catalyst, since it acts on HC, CO, and NOx. A replacement unit must be an original Acura part or its equivalent. The three way catalytic converter must operate at a high temperature for the chemical reactions to take place. It can set on fire any com- bustible materials that come near it. Park your car away from high grass, dry leaves, or other flammables. Three Way Catalytic Converter Keep the engine tuned-up. Have your car diagnosed and repaired if it is misfiring, back- firing, stalling, or otherwise not running properly. THREE WAY CATALYTIC CONVERTER A defective three way catalytic converter contributes to air pollution, and can impair your engine’s per- formance. Follow these guidelines to protect your car’s three way catalytic converter. Always use unleaded gasoline. Even a small amount of leaded gasoline can contaminate the catalyst metals, making the three way catalytic converter ineffective. Technical Information 347 State Emissions Testing Testing of Readiness Codes If you take your vehicle for a state emissions test shortly after the battery has been disconnected or gone dead, it may not pass the test. This is because of certain ‘‘readiness codes’’ that must be set in the on- board diagnostics for the emissions systems. These codes are erased when the battery is disconnected, and set again only after several days of driving under a variety of conditions. 348 Technical Information If the testing facility determines that the readiness codes are not set, you will be requested to return at a later date to complete the test. If you must get the vehicle re-tested within the next two or three days, you can condition the vehicle for re-testing by doing the following. Make sure the gas tank is nearly, but not completely, full (around 3/4). Make sure the vehicle has been parked with the engine off for 8 hours or more. Make sure the ambient temperature is between 20° and 95°F. Without touching the accelerator pedal, start the engine and let it idle for 20 seconds. Keep the vehicle in Park. Increase the engine speed to 2,000 rpm and hold it there until the temperature gauge rises to at least 1/4 of the scale (approximately 3 minutes). Select a nearby lightly traveled major highway where you can maintain a speed of 50 to 60 mph (80 to 97 km/h) for at least 20 minutes. Drive on the highway in D 4 . Do not use the cruise control. When traffic allows, drive for 90 seconds without moving the accelerator pedal. (Vehicle speed may vary slightly; this is okay.) If you cannot do this for a continuous 90 seconds because of traffic conditions, drive for at least 30 seconds, then repeat it two more times (for a total of 90 seconds). Then drive in city/suburban traffic for at least 10 minutes. When traffic conditions allow, let the vehicle coast for several seconds without using the accelerator pedal or the brake pedal. If the testing facility determines the readiness codes are still not set, see your Acura dealer. State Emissions Testing Technical Information 349 350 Warranty and Customer Relations Customer Relations Information ................................ . 352 Warranty Coverages .................... . 353 Reporting Safety Defects (U.S. Cars) ................................. . 354 Authorized Manuals ..................... . 355 Warranty and Customer Relations 351 Customer Relations Information Acura dealership personnel are If you are dissatisfied with the Canadian Owners: trained professionals. They should decision made by the dealership’s CUSTOMER RELATIONS be able to answer all your questions. management, contact the Acura RELATIONS AVEC LA CLIENTÈLE If you encounter a problem that your Client Services Office. Honda Canada Inc. dealership does not solve to your 715 Milner Avenue satisfaction, please discuss it with U.S. Owners: Toronto, ON the dealership’s management. The American Honda Motor Co., Inc. M1B 2K8 Service Manager or General Acura Client Services Manager can help. Almost all Mail Stop 500-2N-7E Tel: 1-888-9-ACURA-9 problems are solved in this way. 1919 Torrance Blvd. Torrance, CA 90501-2746 Fax: Toll-free 1-877-939-0909 Toronto (416) 287-4776 Tel: (800) 382-2238 In Puerto Rico and the U.S. Virgin Vehicle Identification Number Islands: (see page 336 ) Name and address of the dealer Vortex Motor Corp. who services your car Bella International Date of purchase P.O. Box 190816 Mileage on your car San Juan, PR 00919-0816 Your name, address, and tele- (787) 250-4327 phone number A detailed description of the problem Name of the dealer who sold the vehicle to you Warranty and Customer Relations When you call or write, please give us this information: 352 Warranty Coverages U.S. Owners Seat Belt Limited Warranty ɻ a seat Replacement Battery Limited Your new Acura is covered by these belt that fails to function properly is Warranty ɻ provides prorated warranties: covered for the useful life of the coverage for a replacement battery vehicle. purchased from an Acura dealer. New Vehicle Limited Warranty ɻ covers your new vehicle, except for Rust Perforation Limited Warranty Replacement Muffler Lifetime the battery, emissions control ɻ all exterior body panels are Limited Warranty ɻ provides systems and accessories, against covered for rust-through from the coverage for as long as the pur- defects in materials and inside for the specified time period chaser of the muffler owns the workmanship. with no mileage limit. vehicle. Emissions Control Systems Defects Accessory Limited Warranty ɻ Restrictions and exclusions apply to Warranty and Emissions Acura accessories are covered under all these warranties. Please read the Performance Warranty ɻ these two this warranty. Time and mileage 2004 Acura Warranty Information warranties cover your car’s emis- limits depend on the type of booklet that came with your car for sions control systems. Time, mileage, accessory and other factors. Please precise information on warranty and coverage are conditional. Please read your warranty manual for coverages. Your Acura’s original read the warranty manual for exact details. tires are covered by their information. manufacturer. Tire warranty Replacement Parts Limited information is in a separate booklet. Original Equipment Battery Limited Warranty ɻ covers all Acura Warranty ɻ this warranty gives up replacement parts against defects in Canadian Owners to 100 percent credit toward a materials and workmanship. Please refer to the 2004 Warranty replacement battery. Manual that came with your car. Warranty and Customer Relations 353 Reporting Safety Defects (U.S. Cars) If you believe that your car has a If NHTSA receives similar com- defect which could cause a crash or plaints, it may open an investigation, could cause injury or death, you and if it finds that a safety defect should immediately inform the exists in a group of vehicles, it may National Highway Traffic Safety order a recall and remedy campaign. Administration (NHTSA) in addition However, NHTSA cannot become to notifying Acura Automobile involved in individual problems Division, American Honda Motor Co., between you, your dealer, or Acura Inc. Automobile Division, American Honda Motor Co., Inc. 354 Warranty and Customer Relations To contact NHTSA, you may either call the Auto Safety Hotline toll-free at 1-800-424-9393 (or 366-0123 in Washington D.C. area) or write to: NHTSA, U.S. Department of Transportation, Washington, D.C. 20590. You can also obtain other information about motor vehicle safety from the Hotline. Authorized Manuals Purchasing Factory Authorized Manuals (U.S. only) Valid only for sales within the U.S. Canadian owners should The publications shown below can be purchased from Helm contact their authorized Acura dealer. Incorporated. You can order in any of three ways: Detach and mail the order form on the right half of this page ORDER TOLL FREE: 1-800-782-4356 Call Helm Inc. at 1-800-782-4356 (credit card orders only) (NOTE: For Credit Card Holder Orders Only) Go online at www. helminc. com Monday-Friday 8:00 A.M. ɻ 6:00 P.M. EST If you are interested in other years or models, contact Helm Inc. MINIMUM CREDIT CARD PURCHASE $10.00 at 1-800-782-4356 OR Publication Form Description Price By completing this form you can order the materials desired. You can Form Number Each ˎ pay by check or money order, or charge to your credit card. Mail to 61SZ305 1996-2001 Acura 3.5 RL $77.00 Helm Incorporated at the address shown on the back of the order form. Service Manual Base Book 61SZ308 2004 Acura 3.5 RL Service Manual Supplement 61SZ308EL 1996-2004 Acura 3.5 RL $38.00 2 PUBLICATION NUMBER $47.00 0 0 VEHICLE MODEL Qty Price Total Name Year Each ˎ Price Electrical Troubleshooting Manual 4 61SZ330 1996-2004 Acura 3.5 RL $44.00 Body Repair Manual 31SZ3680 2004 Acura 3.5 RL Owner’s Manual $42.00 A C U 31SZ3780 2004 Acura 3.5 RL Navigation Manual $29.00 31SZ3M10 2004 Acura 3.5 RL $12.00 ˎ Prices are subject to change without TOTAL MATERIAL Maintenance Journal 31SZ3Q10 2004 Acura 3.5 RL Quick Start Guide $12.00 notice and without incurring obligation. Mich. Purchases Add 6% Sales Tax ACU-R Order Form for Previous Years- FREE Orders are mailed within 10 days. Please HANDLING CHARGE $6.00 Indicate Year and Model Desired allow adequate time for delivery. ˎ Prices are subject to change without notice and without incurring GRAND TOTAL obligation. 355 Authorized Manuals Service Manual: Electrical Troubleshooting Manual: Body Repair Manual: 356 NOTE: Dealers and Companies please provide dealer or company name, and also the name of the person to whose attention the shipment should be sent. For purchases outside U.S.A. please write to the address shown below for a quotation. P.O. BOX 07280·DETROIT, MICHIGAN 48207·1-800-782-4356 This manual covers maintenance and recommended procedures for repair to engine and chassis components. S H I It is written for the Journeyman mechanic, but is simple enough for most mechanically-inclined owners to under- stand. P T O This manual complements the Service Manual by providing in-depth troubleshooting information for each electrical circuit in your car. P A Y M E N T Customer Name Attention Street Address ɻ No P.O. Box Number Apartment Number City State & Zip Code Daytime Telephone Number ( ) Check or money order enclosed payable to Helm Inc U.S. funds only. Do not send cash Master Card These Publications cannot be returned for credit without receiving advance authorization within 14 days of delivery. On returns, a restocking fee may be applied against the original order. This manual describes the procedures involved in the ɻ replacement of damaged body parts. VISA Check here if your billing address is different from the shipping address shown above. Account Number Expiration: Mo. Yr. ɻ CUSTOMER SIGNATURE DATE Index A Anti-theft Steering Column B Lock .............................................. . 82 Accessories and Modifications ... . 210 Anti-theft System .......................... . 181 Battery Accessories ................................ . 210 Appearance Care .......................... . 299 Charging System Additional Safety Precautions . . 211 Ashtrays ......................................... . 115 Indicator ........................... . 58, 322 Modifications ............................ . 211 Audio Controls, Remote ............... . 178 Jump Starting ............................ . 316 ACCESSORY (Ignition Key Audio System ........................ . 134, 151 Maintenance .............................. . 272 Position) ....................................... . 82 Automatic Climate Control Specifications ............................ . 339 Accessory Power Socket ............. . 113 System ........................................ . 120 Before Driving .............................. . 203 Additives, Engine Oil .................... . 254 Automatic Lighting ......................... . 69 Belts, Seat .................................... . 8, 44 Airbag (SRS) ......................... . 9, 47, 49 Automatic Seat Belt Tensioners ... . 45 Beverage Holder ........................... . 110 Air Cleaner Element ..................... . 267 Automatic Speed Control ............. . 182 Body Repair ................................... . 306 Air Conditioning System .............. . 120 Automatic Transmission .............. . 218 Brakes Maintenance .............................. . 277 Capacity, Fluid .......................... . 338 Anti-lock System (ABS) ........... . 224 Usage ................................. . 122, 127 Checking Fluid Level ............... . 264 Break-in, New Linings ............. . 204 Air Outlets (Vents) ....................... . 120 Shifting ....................................... . 218 Bulb Replacement .................... . 292 Air Pressure, Tires ....................... . 279 Shift Lever Position Indicator . . 218 Fluid ........................................... . 266 Alarm, Anti-theft ........................... . 181 Shift Lever Positions ................ . 218 Parking ....................................... . 107 Alcohol in Gasoline ....................... . 343 Shift Lock Release .................... . 221 System Indicator ................. . 58, 325 Aluminum Wheels, Cleaning ....... . 301 Wear Indicators ........................ . 223 Antifreeze ...................................... . 256 Braking System ............................. . 223 Anti-lock Brakes (ABS) Break-in, New Vehicle ................. . 204 Indicator ............................... . 60, 225 Brightness Control, Instruments .. . 71 Operation ................................... . 224 Brights, Headlights ........................ . 68 Anti-theft, Audio System .............. . 180 CONTINUED I Index Bulb Replacement Back-up Lights .......................... . 292 Brake Lights .............................. . 292 Ceiling Lights ............................ . 295 Courtesy Lights ........................ . 295 Fog Lights ................................. . 289 Front Side Marker Lights ........ . 291 Headlights ................................. . 288 High-mount Brake Light ......... . 293 License Plate Lights ................. . 294 Specifications ............................ . 339 Trunk Light ............................... . 296 Turn Signal Lights .................... . 291 Bulbs, Halogen .............................. . 288 C Cancel Button ................................ . 184 Capacities Chart ............................ . 338 Carbon Monoxide Hazard ............. . 53 Carrying, Cargo ............................ . 212 Cassette Player Care ............................................ . 163 Operation ........................... . 139, 159 CAUTION, Explanation of .............. . ii CD Changer .......................... . 143, 164 II ................................ Ceiling Lights . 116 ........................ Certification Label . 336 ............................................ Chains . 285 Changing Oil ........................................ How to . 253 ...................................... When to . 244 .................... Changing a Flat Tire . 309 ............ Changing Engine Coolant . 258 ... Charging System Indicator . 58, 322 ............ Checklist, Before Driving . 216 ..................................... Child Safety . 20 ....................................... Child Seats . 24 .......... Tether Anchorage Points . 39 ............................. Using LATCH . 40 .................. Childproof Door Locks . 87 .......................... Cigarette Lighter . 114 ................................... Cleaner, Air . 267 Cleaning .................... Aluminum Wheels . 301 ................................... Carpeting . 302 ...................................... Exterior . 300 ......................................... Fabric . 303 ................................. Floor Mats . 302 ....................................... Interior . 302 ....................................... Leather . 303 ................................... Seat Belts . 303 ........................................... Vinyl . 303 Windows .................................... . 304 Wood Trim ................................ . 304 Climate Control System ............... . 120 Clock, Setting the ................. . 108, 158 Code, Audio System ..................... . 180 CO in the Exhaust ........................ . 345 Coin Box ........................................ . 111 Cold Weather, Starting in ............ . 217 Compact Spare .............................. . 308 Console Compartment ................. . 111 Consumer Information ˎ ............... . 352 Controls, Instruments and ............. . 55 Coolant Adding ........................................ . 256 Checking .................................... . 208 Proper Solution ......................... . 256 Replacing ................................... . 258 Temperature Gauge ................... . 65 Corrosion Protection .................... . 305 Courtesy Lights ............................ . 117 Crankcase Emissions Control System ........................................ . 345 Cruise Control Operation ............ . 182 Customer Relations Office .......... . 352 Index D Driving ........................................... . 215 Emissions Testing, State ............. . 348 Economy .................................... . 209 Engine DANGER, Explanation of ................ . ii In Bad Weather ......................... . 230 Belts ............................................ . 278 Dashboard ................................... . 2, 56 In Foreign Countries ................ . 344 Coolant Temperature Gauge .... . 65 Daytime Running Lights ................ . 70 Driving Position Memory Malfunction Indicator Defects, Reporting Safety ............ . 354 System .......................................... . 98 Lamp ................................ . 59, 323 Defogger, Rear Window ................ . 76 Dust and Pollen Filter .................. . 278 Oil Pressure Indicator ........ . 58, 321 Defrosting the Windows ...... . 126, 131 Oil, What Kind to Use .............. . 251 Differential Oil .............................. . 265 E Overheating ............................... . 319 Dimensions .................................... . 338 Specifications ............................ . 339 Dimming the Headlights ............... . 68 Economy, Fuel .............................. . 209 Speed Limiter ............................ . 220 Dipstick Emergencies on the Road ............ . 307 Starting ....................................... . 217 Automatic Transmission .......... . 264 Battery, Jump Starting ............. . 316 Engine Speed Limiter ................... . 220 Engine Oil .................................. . 207 Brake System Indicator ........... . 325 Ethanol in Gasoline ...................... . 343 Directional Signals .......................... . 71 Changing a Flat Tire ................ . 309 Evaporative Emissions Controls . . 345 Disc Brake Wear Indicators ........ . 223 Charging System Indicator ..... . 322 Exhaust Fumes ............................... . 53 Disposal of Used Oil ..................... . 255 Checking the Fuses .................. . 328 Exhaust Gas Recirculation Doors Low Oil Pressure Indicator ..... . 321 System ........................................ . 346 Locking and Unlocking .............. . 83 Malfunction Indicator Lamp ... . 323 Expectant Mothers, Use of Seat Lockout Prevention .................... . 84 Manually Closing Moonroof ... . 326 Belts by ........................................ . 18 Monitor Light .............................. . 61 Overheated Engine .................. . 319 Exterior, Cleaning the .................. . 300 Power Door Locks ...................... . 83 Emergency Brake ......................... . 107 DOT Tire Quality Grading .......... . 340 Emergency Flashers ...................... . 75 Drive Belts ..................................... . 278 Emergency Towing ...................... . 332 Driver and Passenger Safety ........... . 5 Emergency Trunk Opener ............ . 89 Emissions Controls ....................... . 345 CONTINUED III Index F G IV Fuel ................................................. . 204 Fill Door and Cap ...................... . 205 Fabric, Cleaning ............................ . 303 Gauge ........................................... . 65 Fan, Interior .......................... . 124, 129 Octane Requirement ................ . 204 Features, Comfort and Oxygenated ............................... . 343 Convenience .............................. . 119 Reserve Indicator ........................ . 62 Filling the Fuel Tank .................... . 205 Tank, Filling the ........................ . 205 Filters Fuel Mileage, Improving .............. . 209 Air Cleaner ................................ . 267 Fuses, Checking the ..................... . 328 Dust and Pollen ......................... . 278 Oil ............................................... . 255 Flashers, Hazard Warning ............. . 75 Flat Tire, Changing a ................... . 309 Gas Mileage Improving ................ . 209 Floor Mats ..................................... . 302 Gasohol .......................................... . 343 Fluids Gasoline ......................................... . 204 Automatic Transmission .......... . 264 Fuel Reserve Indicator ............... . 62 Brake .......................................... . 266 Gauge ........................................... . 65 Differential ................................ . 265 Octane Requirement ................ . 204 Power Steering .......................... . 266 Tank, Filling the ........................ . 205 Windshield Washer .................. . 263 Gas Station Procedures ................ . 205 FM Stereo Radio Gauges ............................................. . 63 Reception ........................... . 135, 152 Engine Coolant Temperature ... . 65 Fog Lights ........................................ . 72 Fuel ............................................... . 65 Foreign Countries, Driving in ..... . 344 Speedometer ............................... . 63 Four-way Flashers .......................... . 75 Tachometer ................................. . 63 Front Airbags .............................. . 9, 47 ............. Halogen Headlight Bulbs . 288 .............. Hazard Warning Flashers . 75 Headlights ........................................ Aiming . 288 .................... Automatic Lighting . 69 ............ Daytime Running Lights . 70 .................. High Beam Indicator . 62 .................... Lights On Indicator . 59 ......................... Reminder Chime . 68 ........ Replacing Halogen Bulbs . 288 ................................... Turning on . 68 .............................. Head Restraints . 94 ............. High Altitude, Starting at . 217 ................. High-Low Beam Switch . 68 .............. High-mount Brake Light . 293 GAWR (Gross Axle Weight ....................................... Rating) . 233 ............ Gearshift Lever Positions . 218 .............................. Glass Cleaning . 304 ........................................ Glove Box . 90 GVWR (Gross Vehicle Weight ....................................... Rating) . 233 H Index HomeLink Universal Interior Cleaning ........................... . 302 Indicator ....................................... . 57 Transmitter ............................... . 186 Introduction ........................................ . i Parking ......................................... . 68 Hood Latch .................................... . 267 Turn Signal .................................. . 71 Hood, Opening the ....................... . 206 J Load Limit ..................................... . 213 Horn .................................................. . 67 LOCK (Ignition Key Position) ...... . 82 Hydroplaning ................................. . 231 Jacking up the Vehicle ................. . 310 Locks Jack, Tire ....................................... . 310 Anti-theft Steering Column ....... . 82 I Jump Starting ................................ . 316 Childproof Door .......................... . 87 Fuel Fill Door ............................ . 205 Identification Number, Vehicle ... . 336 K Glove Box .................................... . 90 Ignition Power Door ................................. . 83 Keys .............................................. . 79 Keys .................................................. . 79 Trunk ........................................... . 88 Switch ........................................... . 82 Trunk Pass-through Cover ........ . 95 Timing Control System ............ . 346 L Low Coolant Level ........................ . 208 Immobilizer System ........................ . 80 Low Fuel Indicator ......................... . 62 Important Safety Precautions ......... . 6 Label, Certification ....................... . 336 Low Oil Pressure Indicator ... . 58, 321 Indicators, Instrument Panel ......... . 57 Lane Change, Signaling ................. . 71 Lubricant Specifications Chart ... . 338 Infant Restraint ............................... . 28 Lap/Shoulder Belt .......................... . 44 Luggage ......................................... . 212 Infant Seats ...................................... . 28 Learning Key ................................... . 80 Tether Anchorage Points .......... . 39 Leather, Cleaning ......................... . 303 Using LATCH ............................. . 40 Lights On Indicator ........................ . 59 Inflation, Proper Tire ................... . 279 Lighter, Cigarette ......................... . 114 Inside Mirror ................................... . 96 Lights Inspection, Tire ............................. . 281 Bulb Replacement .................... . 288 Instrument Panel ............................ . 57 Ceiling ........................................ . 116 Instrument Panel Brightness ........ . 71 Courtesy ..................................... . 117 CONTINUED V Index M O P N VI Maintenance .................................. . 239 Octane Requirement, Gasoline ... . 204 Paint Touch-up .............................. . 301 Owner Maintenance Checks ... . 249 Odometer ......................................... . 64 Panel Brightness Control .............. . 71 Record ................................. . 246-248 Odometer, Trip ............................... . 64 Park Gear Position ........................ . 219 Required Indicator ...................... . 66 Oil Parking ........................................... . 222 Safety .......................................... . 240 Change, How to ........................ . 253 Parking Brake ............................... . 107 Schedule ............................. . 244-245 Change, When to ...................... . 244 Parking Brake and Brake Malfunction Indicator Lamp . . 59, 323 Checking Engine ...................... . 207 System Indicator ................. . 58, 325 Memory, Driving Position ............. . 98 Pressure Indicator .............. . 58, 321 Parking Lights ................................. . 68 Meters, Gauges ............................... . 63 Selecting Proper Viscosity Parking Over Things that Burn .. . 347 Methanol in Gasoline ................... . 343 Chart ...................................... . 252 PGM-FI System ............................. . 346 Mirrors, Adjusting .......................... . 96 ON (Ignition Key Position) ........... . 82 Polishing and Waxing .................. . 301 Moonroof ....................................... . 105 Onboard Refueling Vapor Pre-Drive Safety Checklist ............ . 11 Closing Manually ...................... . 326 Recovery .................................... . 345 Pregnancy, Using Seat Belts ......... . 18 Operation ................................... . 105 OnStar ............................................ . 192 Protecting Adults ............................ . 12 Opening the Trunk ......................... . 88 Additional Safety Precautions ... . 19 Operation in Foreign Countries .. . 344 Advice for Pregnant Women ..... . 18 Outside Mirrors .............................. . 96 Protecting Children ........................ . 20 Neutral Gear Position ................... . 219 Outside Temperature Indicator .... . 65 Protecting Infants ....................... . 28 New Vehicle Break-in .................. . 204 Overheating, Engine .................... . 319 Protecting Larger Children ....... . 35 NOTICE, Explanation of ................... . i Owner Maintenance Checks ....... . 249 Protecting Small Children ......... . 32 Numbers, Identification ............... . 336 Oxygenated Fuels ......................... . 343 Using Child Seats with Tethers ..................................... . 39 Using LATCH ............................. . 40 Index R Replacing Seat Belts After a Cleaning ..................................... . 303 Crash ............................................ . 46 Lap/Shoulder Belt ...................... . 44 Radiator Overheating ................... . 319 Reserve Tank, Engine Coolant ... . 208 Maintenance ................................ . 46 Radio/Cassette Sound Reverse Gear Position .................. . 219 Reminder Light and System ................................ . 134, 151 Rotation, Tire ................................ . 282 Beeper ................................ . 44, 58 Readiness Codes ........................... . 324 Replacement ................................ . 46 Rear Lights, Bulb Replacement .. . 292 S System Components ................... . 44 Rear Seat Armrest .......................... . 95 Use During Pregnancy ............... . 18 Rear Ventilation ............................ . 132 Safety Belts ........................................ . 8 Wearing a Lap/Shoulder Belt ... . 15 Rear View Mirror ............................ . 96 Safety Defects, Reporting ˎ ......... . 354 Seat Heaters .................................. . 100 Rear Window Defogger ................. . 76 Safety Features ................................. . 7 Seat Position Memory .................... . 98 Reclining the Seat Backs ............... . 92 Airbags ........................................... . 9 Seats, Adjusting the ........................ . 91 Reminder Lights ............................. . 57 Door Locks .................................. . 10 Security Alarm System ................ . 181 Remote Transmitter ....................... . 84 Head Restraints .......................... . 10 Serial Number ............................... . 336 Replacement Information Seat Belts ....................................... . 8 Service Intervals ........................... . 244 Air Cleaner Element ................. . 267 Seats & Seat-Backs ..................... . 10 Service Manual ˎ ........................... . 355 Dust and Pollen Filter .............. . 278 Safety Labels, Location of ............. . 54 Service Station Procedures ......... . 205 Engine Coolant .......................... . 258 Safety Messages ............................... . ii Setting the Clock .................. . 108, 158 Engine Oil and Filter ................ . 253 Satellite Digital Radio ................... . 173 Shifting the Automatic Fuses .......................................... . 328 Seat Belts ..................................... . 8, 44 Transmission ............................. . 218 Light Bulbs ................................ . 288 Additional Information ............... . 44 Shift Lever Position Indicator ..... . 218 Schedule .................................... . 242 Advice for Pregnant Women ..... . 18 Shift Lock Release ........................ . 221 Spark Plugs ................................ . 269 Automatic Seat Belt Tensioner . . 45 Tires ........................................... . 283 Child Seat Lower Anchors ......... . 40 Wiper Blades ............................. . 275 Child Seat Tether Anchorage Points ........................................ . 39 CONTINUED VII Index Side Airbags .................................... . 49 SRS Components ........................ . 47 T How the Side Airbag Cutoff SRS Service .................................. . 52 Indicator Light Works ........... . 51 SRS Indicator ............................. . 50, 59 How Your Side Airbags Work ... . 49 START (Ignition Key Position) .... . 82 Side Marker Lights, Bulb Starting the Engine ....................... . 217 Replacement in ......................... . 291 In Cold Weather at High Signaling Turns ............................... . 71 Altitude .................................. . 217 Ski Sleeve ....................................... . 101 With a Dead Battery ................ . 316 Snow Tires ..................................... . 285 State Emissions Testing .......... . 348 Solvent-type Cleaners ................... . 300 Steam Coming from Engine ........ . 319 Sound System ........................ . 134, 151 Steering Wheel Spare Tire Adjustments ................................ . 76 Inflating ...................................... . 308 Anti-theft Column Lock ............. . 82 Specifications ............................ . 339 Position Memory ........................ . 98 Spark Plugs, Replacing ................ . 269 Stereo Sound System ........... . 134, 151 Specifications Charts .................... . 338 Storing Your Car ........................... . 297 Speed Control ................................ . 182 Sun Visor ........................................ . 112 Speedometer ................................... . 63 Sunglasses Holder ........................ . 109 Spotlights ....................................... . 116 Supplemental Restraint SRS, Additional Information .......... . 47 System ............................ . 9, 47, 49 Additional Safety Precautions ... . 52 Service Precautions .................... . 52 Automatic Seat Belt Servicing ...................................... . 52 Tensioners ............................... . 45 SRS Indicator ......................... . 50, 59 How the SRS Indicator Light System Components ................... . 47 Works ....................................... . 50 Tensioners, Seat Belts ............... . 45 How Your Airbags Work ..... . 47, 49 Synthetic Oil .................................. . 252 VIII Tachometer ..................................... . 63 Taillights, Changing Bulbs in ...... . 292 Taking Care of the Unexpected . . 307 Tape Player ........................... . 139, 159 Technical Descriptions DOT Tire Quality Grading ...... . 340 Emissions Control Systems ..... . 345 Oxygenated Fuels ..................... . 343 Three Way Catalytic Converter ............................... . 347 Temperature Gauge ....................... . 65 Tensioners, Seat Belts ................... . 45 Tether Anchorage Points .............. . 39 Theft Deterrent System ............... . 181 Theft Protection ............................ . 180 Three Way Catalytic Converter .. . 347 Time, Setting the .................. . 108, 158 Timing Belt .................................... . 279 Tire Chains .................................... . 285 Tire Information ........................... . 342 Tire, How to Change a Flat ......... . 309 Tires ............................................... . 279 Air Pressure .............................. . 280 Balancing ................................... . 282 ......................... Checking Wear . 281 .......................... Compact Spare . 308 ...... DOT Tire Quality Grading . 340 ...................................... Inflation . 279 .................................. Inspection . 281 .............................. Maintenance . 282 ................................... Replacing . 283 ...................................... Rotating . 282 ........................................... Snow . 285 ............................ Specifications . 339 .......................... Winter Driving . 284 ................... Tools, Tire Changing . 309 ............................... Torn Seat Belts . 46 Towing ..................................... A Trailer . 232 .......... By Emergency Wrecker . 332 Transmission Checking Fluid Level, .............................. Automatic . 264 ........................... Fluid Selection . 264 .............. Identification Number . 337 ............. Shifting the Automatic . 218 ..................................... Treadwear . 340 ....................................... Trip Meter . 64 ................................................ Trunk . 88 ........ Emergency Trunk Opener . 89 Index Opening the ................................. . 88 Ventilation ............................. . 122, 127 Open Monitor Light ................... . 61 VIN ................................................. . 336 Turn Signals .................................... . 71 Vinyl Cleaning ............................... . 303 Viscosity, Oil .................................. . 252 U W Underside, Cleaning ..................... . 305 Unexpected, Taking Care WARNING, Explanation of ............. . ii of the .......................................... . 307 Warning Labels, Location of ......... . 54 Uniform Tire Quality Grading .... . 340 Warranty Coverages ˎ .................. . 353 Unleaded Gasoline ........................ . 204 Washer, Windshield Upholstery Cleaning ..................... . 302 Checking the Fluid Level ........ . 263 Used Oil, How to Dispose of ....... . 255 Operation ..................................... . 75 Washing ......................................... . 300 V Waxing and Polishing .................. . 301 Wheels Vanity Mirror ................................ . 112 Adjusting the Steering ............... . 76 Vehicle Capacity Load ................. . 213 Alignment and Balance ............ . 282 Vehicle Dimensions ...................... . 338 Cleaning Aluminum Alloys ...... . 301 Vehicle Identification Number .... . 336 Compact Spare .......................... . 308 Vehicle Stability Assist (VSA) Wrench ...................................... . 310 System .................................... . 227 VSA System Indicator ........ . 60, 228 VSA Activation Indicator ... . 60, 227 VSA Off Switch ......................... . 228 Vehicle Storage ............................. . 297 CONTINUED IX Index Windows Cleaning ..................................... . 304 Operating the Power ................ . 103 Rear, Defogger ........................... . 76 Windshield Cleaning ....................................... . 73 Defroster ........................... . 126, 131 Washers ....................................... . 75 Wipers, Windshield Changing Blades ....................... . 275 Operation ..................................... . 73 Wood Trim .................................... . 304 Worn Tires .................................... . 281 Wrecker, Emergency Towing ..... . 332 ˎ U.S. and Canada only X Service Information Summary Gasoline: Fuel Tank Capacity: Recommended Engine Oil: Power Steering Fluid: Premium unleaded gasoline, Honda Power Steering Fluid pump octane number of 91 or preferred, or another brand of higher. power steering fluid as a temporary replacement. Do not use ATF (see page ). 18.0 US gal (68 ) Brake Fluid: Honda Heavy Duty Brake Fluid DOT 3 preferred, or a DOT 3 or DOT 4 brake fluid as a temporary replacement (see page ). Automatic Transmission Fluid: 266 API Premium grade 5W-30 detergent oil (see page ). 266 Oil change capacity (including filter): 4.9 US qt (4.6 ) Honda ATF-Z1 (Automatic Transmission Fluid) preferred, or a DEXRON III ATF as a temporary replacement (see page ). 253 264 Tire Pressure (measured cold): Front/Rear: 30 psi (210 kPa , 2.1 kgf/cm ) Spare Tire Pressure: 60 psi (420 kPa , 4.2 kgf/cm )